SME Server er frit tilgængelig under GNU General Public Licens, hvilket kun er muligt gennem SME Server gruppens indsats. Ikke desto mindre er adgangen til, og kvaliteten af, SME Server afhængig af, at omkostninger til hosting, serverhardware mm. dækkes.
Derfor anmoder vi om bidrag til at dække disse omkostninger og til at understøtte den videre udvikling.
a) Hvis du er en skole, en kirke, en almennyttig organisation eller en person som bruger SME til private formål, vil vi sætte pris på at du bidrager, indenfor dine muligheder, til udgifterne til hosting, vedligehold og udvikling.
b) Hvis du er en virksomhed eller en konsulent og du anvender SME i forbindelse med dit arbejde til at skabe indtægter, forventer vi at du bidrager med et beløb i forhold til den indtægt det skaber og antallet af de servere du har etableret. Hjælp venligst projektet
Denne software er UDEN NOGEN FORM FOR GARANTI. Klik venligst her for at se detaljerede oplysninger om support, garanti og licens.
For at udføre system administration, klik på et af linkene i menuen i venstre side af skærmen.
]]>SME Server er frit tilgængelig under GNU General Public Licens, hvilket kun er muligt gennem SME Server gruppens indsats. Ikke desto mindre er adgangen til, og kvaliteten af, SME Server afhængig af, at omkostninger til hosting, serverhardware mm. dækkes.
Derfor anmoder vi om bidrag til at dække disse omkostninger og til at understøtte den videre udvikling.
a) Hvis du er en skole, en kirke, en almennyttig organisation eller en person som bruger SME til private formål, vil vi sætte pris på at du bidrager, indenfor dine muligheder, til udgifterne til hosting, vedligehold og udvikling.
b) Hvis du er en virksomhed eller en konsulent og du anvender SME i forbindelse med dit arbejde til at skabe indtægter, forventer vi at du bidrager med et beløb i forhold til den indtægt det skaber og antallet af de servere du har etableret. Hjælp venligst projektet
Denne software er UDEN NOGEN FORM FOR GARANTI. Klik venligst her for at se detaljerede oplysninger om support, garanti og licens.
For at udføre system administration, klik på et af linkene i menuen i venstre side af skærmen.
]]>Support og licensinfo
TDenne software er frigivet under betingelser angivet i Support og licensinfo page. ]]>Support og licensinfo
TDenne software er frigivet under betingelser angivet i Support og licensinfo page. ]]>SME Server ist unter der GNU General Public License frei verfügbar und wird durch die Bemühungen der SME Server Community stetig weiterentwickelt. Allerdings verursacht es Kosten, SME Server mit hoher Qualität verfügbar zu machen, z. B. durch Hosting, Server-Hardware, usw.
Daher wird um Spenden zur Finanzierung der Kosten und Weiterentwicklung gebeten.
a) Wenn Sie eine Schule, eine Kirche, eine gemeinnützige Organisation oder eine Privatperson sind, würden wir uns über einen Beitrag innerhalb Ihres finanziellen Rahmens freuen, der mithilft die Kosten für Hosting, Wartung und Entwicklung zu decken.
b) Wenn Sie ein Unternehmen sind oder im Rahmen Ihrer Tätigkeit Gewinne erzielen, erwarten wir von Ihnen eine angemessene Spende im Einklang mit der Höhe Ihrer Gewinne und der Anzahl der eingesetzten Server. Bitte besuchen Sie für eine Spende
Diese Software wird ABSOLUT OHNE GARANTIE zur Verfügung gestellt. Bitte schauen Sie sich hier die ausführlichen Informationen zu Support, Garantie und Lizenzen an.
Um Funktion des Server-Managers aufzurufen, klicken Sie bitte auf einen der Menüpunkte auf der linken Seite des Bildschirms.
]]>SME Server ist unter der GNU General Public License frei verfügbar und wird durch die Bemühungen der SME Server Community stetig weiterentwickelt. Allerdings verursacht es Kosten, SME Server mit hoher Qualität verfügbar zu machen, z. B. durch Hosting, Server-Hardware, usw.
Daher wird um Spenden zur Finanzierung der Kosten und Weiterentwicklung gebeten.
a) Wenn Sie eine Schule, eine Kirche, eine gemeinnützige Organisation oder eine Privatperson sind, würden wir uns über einen Beitrag innerhalb Ihres finanziellen Rahmens freuen, der mithilft die Kosten für Hosting, Wartung und Entwicklung zu decken.
b) Wenn Sie ein Unternehmen sind oder im Rahmen Ihrer Tätigkeit Gewinne erzielen, erwarten wir von Ihnen eine angemessene Spende im Einklang mit der Höhe Ihrer Gewinne und der Anzahl der eingesetzten Server. Bitte besuchen Sie für eine Spende
Diese Software wird ABSOLUT OHNE GARANTIE zur Verfügung gestellt. Bitte schauen Sie sich hier die ausführlichen Informationen zu Support, Garantie und Lizenzen an.
Um Funktion des Server-Managers aufzurufen, klicken Sie bitte auf einen der Menüpunkte auf der linken Seite des Bildschirms.
]]>Unterstützung und Lizenzen
Diese Software ist unter den Bedingungen veröffentlicht, die Sie unter der Unterstützung und Lizenzen Seite nachlesen können. ]]>Unterstützung und Lizenzen
Diese Software ist unter den Bedingungen veröffentlicht, die Sie unter der Unterstützung und Lizenzen Seite nachlesen können. ]]>Ο SME Server είναι ελεύθερα διαθέσιμος με άδεια χρήσης ευρέος κοινού GNU κάτι που καθίσταται δυνατό μόνον μέσα από τις προσπάθειες της κοινότητας SME Server. Παρ' όλα αυτά , η διαθεσιμότητα και ποιότητα του SME Server εξαρτώνται από την δυνατότητα κάλυψης των δαπανών μας, όπως π.χ. δαπάνες φιλοξενίας, αγοράς εξυπηρετητών, κ.λ.π.
Ως εκ τούτου, ζητάμε μια μικρή δωρεά για την αντιμετώπιση των δαπανών και την χρηματοδότηση της παραπέρα ανάπτυξης.
Παρακαλούμε επισκεφθείτε το http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ για να κάνετε τη δωρεά σας.
Το παρόν λογισμικό ΔΕΝ συνοδεύεται από ΚΑΜΙΑ ΑΠΟΛΥΤΩΣ ΕΓΓΥΗΣΗ. Παρακαλούμε κάντε κλικ εδώ για να βρείτε λεπτομερείς πληροφορίες σχετικά με υποστήριξη, εγγύηση και αδειοδότηση.
Για να εκτελέσετε κάποια λειτουργία διαχείρισης συστήματος, κάντε κλικ σε έναν από τους συνδέσμους του μενού που βρίσκεται στην αριστερή πλευρά της οθόνης σας.
]]>Ο SME Server είναι ελεύθερα διαθέσιμος με άδεια χρήσης ευρέος κοινού GNU κάτι που καθίσταται δυνατό μόνον μέσα από τις προσπάθειες της κοινότητας SME Server. Παρ' όλα αυτά , η διαθεσιμότητα και ποιότητα του SME Server εξαρτώνται από την δυνατότητα κάλυψης των δαπανών μας, όπως π.χ. δαπάνες φιλοξενίας, αγοράς εξυπηρετητών, κ.λ.π.
Ως εκ τούτου, ζητάμε μια μικρή δωρεά για την αντιμετώπιση των δαπανών και την χρηματοδότηση της παραπέρα ανάπτυξης.
Παρακαλούμε επισκεφθείτε το https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ για να κάνετε τη δωρεά σας.
Το παρόν λογισμικό ΔΕΝ συνοδεύεται από ΚΑΜΙΑ ΑΠΟΛΥΤΩΣ ΕΓΓΥΗΣΗ. Παρακαλούμε κάντε κλικ εδώ για να βρείτε λεπτομερείς πληροφορίες σχετικά με υποστήριξη, εγγύηση και αδειοδότηση.
Για να εκτελέσετε κάποια λειτουργία διαχείρισης συστήματος, κάντε κλικ σε έναν από τους συνδέσμους του μενού που βρίσκεται στην αριστερή πλευρά της οθόνης σας.
]]>Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών
Αυτό το λογισμικό διανέμεται υπό τους όρους που παρατίθενται στη σελίδα Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών. ]]>Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών
Αυτό το λογισμικό διανέμεται υπό τους όρους που παρατίθενται στη σελίδα Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών. ]]>SME Server esta disponible de forma gratuita bajo la Licencia Pública General GNU y sólo es posible gracias a los esfuerzos de la comunidad SME Server. Sin embargo, la disponibilidad y calidad del SME Server es dependiente de la resolución de nuestros costos, tales como costos de alojamiento, hardware de los servidores, etc.
Debido a ello, pedimos una pequeña donación para ayudarnos a solventar los costos y fomentar el desarrollo.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para realizar la donación.
Este software no provee NINGUN TIPO DE GARANTIA. Haga click aquí para ver un detallado informe de soporte, garantía y concesión de licencias.
Para realizar tareas administrativas, haga click en uno de los enlaces del menú de la izquierda de su pantalla.
]]>SME Server esta disponible de forma gratuita bajo la Licencia Pública General GNU y sólo es posible gracias a los esfuerzos de la comunidad SME Server. Sin embargo, la disponibilidad y calidad del SME Server es dependiente de la resolución de nuestros costos, tales como costos de alojamiento, hardware de los servidores, etc.
Debido a ello, pedimos una pequeña donación para ayudarnos a solventar los costos y fomentar el desarrollo.
Por favor visite https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ para realizar la donación.
Este software no provee NINGUN TIPO DE GARANTIA. Haga click aquí para ver un detallado informe de soporte, garantía y concesión de licencias.
Para realizar tareas administrativas, haga click en uno de los enlaces del menú de la izquierda de su pantalla.
]]>Soporte y concesión de licencias
Este software es liberado bajo los términos enunciados en la página de Soporte y Concesión de licencias. ]]>Soporte y concesión de licencias
Este software es liberado bajo los términos enunciados en la página de Soporte y Concesión de licencias. ]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a small donation to offset costs and fund further development.
Palun külasta http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ toetamaks serveri arendust.
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a small donation to offset costs and fund further development.
Palun külasta https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ toetamaks serveri arendust.
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>Kasutajatugi ja litsents
See tarkvara kasutus põhineb õigustel mis on kättesaadvad Kasutajatugi ja litsentsi lehel page. ]]>Kasutajatugi ja litsents
See tarkvara kasutus põhineb õigustel mis on kättesaadvad Kasutajatugi ja litsentsi lehel page. ]]>SME Server est gratuitement exploitable, selon les termes de la Licence "GNU General Public License", et n'existe que grâce aux efforts de la communauté formée autour de SME Server. Toutefois, la disponibilité et la qualité de SME Server dépendent de notre capacité à régler nos dépenses telles que les coûts liés à l'hébergement, au serveur matériel, etc.
De ce fait, nous demandons une petite contribution financière afin de couvrir nos dépenses et d'assurer les développements à venir.
Veuillez aller sur http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ pour effectuer votre donation.
Ce système d'exploitation ne dispose d'AUCUNE GARANTIE. Veuillez cliquer ici pour afficher les informations détaillées concernant le support technique, la garantie et la licence d'exploitation.
Pour effectuer une tâche d'administration du système, cliquez sur l'un des liens dans le menu situé à la gauche de votre écran.
]]>SME Server est gratuitement exploitable, selon les termes de la Licence "GNU General Public License", et n'existe que grâce aux efforts de la communauté formée autour de SME Server. Toutefois, la disponibilité et la qualité de SME Server dépendent de notre capacité à régler nos dépenses telles que les coûts liés à l'hébergement, au serveur matériel, etc.
De ce fait, nous demandons une petite contribution financière afin de couvrir nos dépenses et d'assurer les développements à venir.
Veuillez aller sur https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ pour effectuer votre donation.
Ce système d'exploitation ne dispose d'AUCUNE GARANTIE. Veuillez cliquer ici pour afficher les informations détaillées concernant le support technique, la garantie et la licence d'exploitation.
Pour effectuer une tâche d'administration du système, cliquez sur l'un des liens dans le menu situé à la gauche de votre écran.
]]>Support technique et license d'exploitation
Ce système d'exploitation est soumis aux règles décrites dans la page consacrée au support technique et à la license d'exploitation. ]]>Support technique et license d'exploitation
Ce système d'exploitation est soumis aux règles décrites dans la page consacrée au support technique et à la license d'exploitation. ]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>תמיכה ורישוי
תוכנה זו משוחררת תחת התנאים המפורטים בדף תמיכה ורישוי]]>תמיכה ורישוי
תוכנה זו משוחררת תחת התנאים המפורטים בדף תמיכה ורישוי]]>Az SME Server szabadon elérhető a GNU General Public License alatt és az SME Server közösség önerejéből jött létre. Azonban az SME Server hozzáférhetősége és minősége nagyban függ a költségeinktől, mint például tárhely költségek, szerver hardver, stb.
Ezért kiadásaink ellensúlyozására és a további fejlesztések támogatására szívesen fogadjuk pénzbeli támogatását.
Kérjük látogassa meg http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ weboldalt adománya elküldéséhez.
Ez a szoftver SEMMILYEN GARANCIÁT NEM TARTALMAZ. Kérjük kattintson ide a részletes terméktámogatási, garancia és licensz információkért.
A rendszer adminisztrálásához kattintson a képernyő bal oldalán lévő oszlop valamely menüpontjára.
]]>Az SME Server szabadon elérhető a GNU General Public License alatt és az SME Server közösség önerejéből jött létre. Azonban az SME Server hozzáférhetősége és minősége nagyban függ a költségeinktől, mint például tárhely költségek, szerver hardver, stb.
Ezért kiadásaink ellensúlyozására és a további fejlesztések támogatására szívesen fogadjuk pénzbeli támogatását.
Kérjük látogassa meg https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ weboldalt adománya elküldéséhez.
Ez a szoftver SEMMILYEN GARANCIÁT NEM TARTALMAZ. Kérjük kattintson ide a részletes terméktámogatási, garancia és licensz információkért.
A rendszer adminisztrálásához kattintson a képernyő bal oldalán lévő oszlop valamely menüpontjára.
]]>Terméktámogatás és licenszelés
Ezen szoftver terjesztési feltételei a Terméktámogatás és licenszelés oldalon olvashatók. ]]>Terméktámogatás és licenszelés
Ezen szoftver terjesztési feltételei a Terméktámogatás és licenszelés oldalon olvashatók. ]]>SME Server tersedia secara bebas dibawah GNU General Public License dan hanya mungkin tercipta melalui usaha dari Komunitas SME Server. Walau demikian, ketersediaan dan kualitas dari SME Server adalah tergantung dari adanya pembiayaan, seperti biaya hosting, perangkat keras server , dll.
Karena itu, kami meminta sedikit donasi untuk menutupi cost dan membiayai pengembangan lebih lanjut.
Kunjungi http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ untuk menyumbang.
Software ini SAMA SEKALI TIDAK DIGARANSI. Silakan klik disini untuk melihat dukungan yang lebih terperinci, garansi dan informasi lisensi.
Untuk menjalankan fungsi pengaturan sistem, klik satu dari link menu disebelah kiri layar anda.
]]>SME Server tersedia secara bebas dibawah GNU General Public License dan hanya mungkin tercipta melalui usaha dari Komunitas SME Server. Walau demikian, ketersediaan dan kualitas dari SME Server adalah tergantung dari adanya pembiayaan, seperti biaya hosting, perangkat keras server , dll.
Karena itu, kami meminta sedikit donasi untuk menutupi cost dan membiayai pengembangan lebih lanjut.
Kunjungi https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ untuk menyumbang.
Software ini SAMA SEKALI TIDAK DIGARANSI. Silakan klik disini untuk melihat dukungan yang lebih terperinci, garansi dan informasi lisensi.
Untuk menjalankan fungsi pengaturan sistem, klik satu dari link menu disebelah kiri layar anda.
]]>Dukungan dan lisensi
Software ini diterbitkan dibawah syarat-syarat yang terdapat pada halaman Dukungan dan Lisensi. ]]>Dukungan dan lisensi
Software ini diterbitkan dibawah syarat-syarat yang terdapat pada halaman Dukungan dan Lisensi. ]]>SME Server è liberamente disponibile sotto licenza GPL (GNU General Public License) grazie all'impegno della comunità di sviluppatori. Mantenere la qualità di SME Server comporta diverse spese, tra cui l'hosting, l'hardware dei server, etc.
Chiediamo quindi una piccola donazione per coprire i costi e finanziare lo sviluppo.
a) Se siete una scuola, una chiesa, una organizzazione no-profit o un privato, sarà gradito un contributo per coprire le spese di hosting, manutenzione e sviluppo.
b) Se siete una azienda o un integratore di servizi e distribuite/installate SME per la vostra attività per generare profitto, siete invitati a fare una donazione commisurata al livello di guadagno prodotto ed al numero di server installati. Aiutate il progetto
Il software viene distribuito SENZA ALCUNA GARANZIA. Consultate click here per informazioni complete su assistenza, garanzia e licenza.
Per amministrare il sistema, fare clic su uno dei link nel menu alla sinistra dello schermo.
]]>SME Server è liberamente disponibile sotto licenza GPL (GNU General Public License) grazie all'impegno della comunità di sviluppatori. Mantenere la qualità di SME Server comporta diverse spese, tra cui l'hosting, l'hardware dei server, etc.
Chiediamo quindi una piccola donazione per coprire i costi e finanziare lo sviluppo.
a) Se siete una scuola, una chiesa, una organizzazione no-profit o un privato, sarà gradito un contributo per coprire le spese di hosting, manutenzione e sviluppo.
b) Se siete una azienda o un integratore di servizi e distribuite/installate SME per la vostra attività per generare profitto, siete invitati a fare una donazione commisurata al livello di guadagno prodotto ed al numero di server installati. Aiutate il progetto
Il software viene distribuito SENZA ALCUNA GARANZIA. Consultate click here per informazioni complete su assistenza, garanzia e licenza.
Per amministrare il sistema, fare clic su uno dei link nel menu alla sinistra dello schermo.
]]>Supporto e licenza
Questo software è rilasciato secondo i termini descritti in Supporto e Licenza page. ]]>Supporto e licenza
Questo software è rilasciato secondo i termini descritti in Supporto e Licenza page. ]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>サポートと免許
このソフトはこの？によって免許されています]]>サポートと免許
このソフトはこの？によって免許されています]]>SME Server er fritt tilgjenglig under GNU General Public License og er bare mulig gjennom insatsen fra SME Server felleskapet. Ikke desto minder er tilgjengligheten og kvaliteten på SME Server avhengig av økonomisk støtte for utgifter til hosting, server maskiner osv.
Derfor ber vi om at du avser en liten donasjon for å bidra til fremtidig utvikling.
Vennligst besøk http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ for å donere.
Programmet kommer uten noen form for garanti. Vennligst klikk her for å se detaljert støtte, garanti og lisensinformasjon.
For å utføre en systemadministrasjon funksjon, klikk på en av linkene i menyen på venstre siden av skjermen.
]]>SME Server er fritt tilgjenglig under GNU General Public License og er bare mulig gjennom insatsen fra SME Server felleskapet. Ikke desto minder er tilgjengligheten og kvaliteten på SME Server avhengig av økonomisk støtte for utgifter til hosting, server maskiner osv.
Derfor ber vi om at du avser en liten donasjon for å bidra til fremtidig utvikling.
Vennligst besøk https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ for å donere.
Programmet kommer uten noen form for garanti. Vennligst klikk her for å se detaljert støtte, garanti og lisensinformasjon.
For å utføre en systemadministrasjon funksjon, klikk på en av linkene i menyen på venstre siden av skjermen.
]]>Støtte og lisensiering
Dette programmet er sluppet under betingelsene på Støtte og Lisensiering siden. ]]>Støtte og lisensiering
Dette programmet er sluppet under betingelsene på Støtte og Lisensiering siden. ]]>SME Server is vrij te verkrijgen onder de GNU General Public License en is enkel mogelijk door de inspanningen van de SME Server gemeenschap. Desalniettemin, de beschikbaarheid en kwaliteit van SME Server is afhankelijk van de dekking van de kosten zoals die van hosting, server hardware, etc.
Dien ten gevolge vragen wij u om een donatie om onze kosten te dekken en te voorzien in de verdere ontwikkeling.
a) Bent u een school, kerk, non-profit organisatie of individu welke SME gebruikt voor persoonlijke doeleinden, dan zouden we het appreciëren indien u binnen uw vermogen doneert tegemoetkoming voor onze kosten betreffende hosting, onderhoud en ontwikkeling.
b) Bent u een bedrijf of een integrator welke SME implementeert ten behoeve van uw werk voor het genereren van inkomsten, dan verwachten wij een donatie evenredig met de hoeveelheid winst die u hiermee maakt en het aantal servers welke u in gebruik heeft. Alstublieft, help het project
Deze software komt met ABSOLUUT GEEN GARANTIE. Klik hier voor een gedetailleerd rapport, garantie- en licentie informatie.
Om systeem administratie taken uit te voeren klik op een van de items uit het menu aan de linker zijde van het scherm.
]]>SME Server is vrij te verkrijgen onder de GNU General Public License en is enkel mogelijk door de inspanningen van de SME Server gemeenschap. Desalniettemin, de beschikbaarheid en kwaliteit van SME Server is afhankelijk van de dekking van de kosten zoals die van hosting, server hardware, etc.
Dien ten gevolge vragen wij u om een donatie om onze kosten te dekken en te voorzien in de verdere ontwikkeling.
a) Bent u een school, kerk, non-profit organisatie of individu welke SME gebruikt voor persoonlijke doeleinden, dan zouden we het appreciëren indien u binnen uw vermogen doneert tegemoetkoming voor onze kosten betreffende hosting, onderhoud en ontwikkeling.
b) Bent u een bedrijf of een integrator welke SME implementeert ten behoeve van uw werk voor het genereren van inkomsten, dan verwachten wij een donatie evenredig met de hoeveelheid winst die u hiermee maakt en het aantal servers welke u in gebruik heeft. Alstublieft, help het project
Deze software komt met ABSOLUUT GEEN GARANTIE. Klik hier voor een gedetailleerd rapport, garantie- en licentie informatie.
Om systeem administratie taken uit te voeren klik op een van de items uit het menu aan de linker zijde van het scherm.
]]>Ondersteuning en licenties
Deze software is uitgegeven onder de voorwaarden zoals deze zijn benoemd in de Ondersteuning en Licenties page. ]]>Ondersteuning en licenties
Deze software is uitgegeven onder de voorwaarden zoals deze zijn benoemd in de Ondersteuning en Licenties page. ]]>SME Server jest dystrybucją ogólnodostępną, rozprowadzaną na licencji GNU GPL i jest tylko dzięki wysiłkom społeczności SME Server. Jednakże, dostępność i jakość SME Server jest uzależniona od naszych wydatków, jak koszty hostingu, serwera, itp.
Proszę odwiedzić http://www.smeserver.org/donate/, aby wesprzeć pieniężnie projekt.
Ten projekt jest rozprowadzany ABSOLUTNIE BEZ ŻADNEJ GWARANCJI. Proszę tutaj kliknąć, aby wyświetlić szczegóły wsparcia, gwarancji i licencji.
Aby przygotować funkcję administracji systemem, kliknij na jeden z hiperłączy w menu po lewej stronie monitora.
]]>SME Server jest dystrybucją ogólnodostępną, rozprowadzaną na licencji GNU GPL i jest tylko dzięki wysiłkom społeczności SME Server. Jednakże, dostępność i jakość SME Server jest uzależniona od naszych wydatków, jak koszty hostingu, serwera, itp.
Proszę odwiedzić https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/, aby wesprzeć pieniężnie projekt.
Ten projekt jest rozprowadzany ABSOLUTNIE BEZ ŻADNEJ GWARANCJI. Proszę tutaj kliknąć, aby wyświetlić szczegóły wsparcia, gwarancji i licencji.
Aby przygotować funkcję administracji systemem, kliknij na jeden z hiperłączy w menu po lewej stronie monitora.
]]>Wsparcie i licencjonowanie
Te oprogramowanie jest wydane na warunkach podanych na tej stronie. ]]>Wsparcie i licencjonowanie
Te oprogramowanie jest wydane na warunkach podanych na tej stronie. ]]>Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU General Public License e somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contuado, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar maiores desenvolvimentos.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem QUALQUER GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU General Public License e somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contuado, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar maiores desenvolvimentos.
Por favor visite https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem QUALQUER GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>Suporte Técnico e Licenciamento
Este software é disponibilizado de acordo com os termos descritos no Painel Suporte e Licenciamento. ]]>Suporte Técnico e Licenciamento
Este software é disponibilizado de acordo com os termos descritos no Painel Suporte e Licenciamento. ]]>O Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU (General Public License) o que somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contudo, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar desenvolvimentos futuros.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem NENHUMA GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>O Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU (General Public License) o que somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contudo, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar desenvolvimentos futuros.
Por favor visite https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem NENHUMA GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>SME Server este liber distribuit sub licenta GNU General Public License și a fost posibil doar datorită comunității SME Server. Oricum, disponibilitatea și calitatea SME Server este dependenta de acoperirea cheltuielilor, cum ar fi costurile de mentenata servere, acces internet, hardwre, etc.
Astfel, vă rugăm să considerați donații pentru a suporta mentenata și dezvoltarea ulterioară.
Vă rugăm vizitați http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ pentru donații.
Acest software vine FARA NICI O GARANȚIE. Apăsați aici pentru a vedea detaliile de suport, garanție și licentțiere.
Pentru a utiliza o functie de administrare apăsați unul din linkurile din meniul din stânga ecranului.
]]>SME Server este liber distribuit sub licenta GNU General Public License și a fost posibil doar datorită comunității SME Server. Oricum, disponibilitatea și calitatea SME Server este dependenta de acoperirea cheltuielilor, cum ar fi costurile de mentenata servere, acces internet, hardwre, etc.
Astfel, vă rugăm să considerați donații pentru a suporta mentenata și dezvoltarea ulterioară.
Vă rugăm vizitați https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ pentru donații.
Acest software vine FARA NICI O GARANȚIE. Apăsați aici pentru a vedea detaliile de suport, garanție și licentțiere.
Pentru a utiliza o functie de administrare apăsați unul din linkurile din meniul din stânga ecranului.
]]>Suport și licențiere
Acest software se supune termenilor de la pagina Support and Licensing . ]]>Suport și licențiere
Acest software se supune termenilor de la pagina Support and Licensing . ]]>SME Server свободно доступен под Стандартной общественной лицензией (GNU General Public License), что является возможным только благодаря усилиям сообщества SME Server. Тем не менее, доступность и качество SME Server зависит от наших расходов, таких, как оплата хостинга, серверное оборудование и т.д.
Таким образом, мы просим небольшое пожертвование для покрытия расходов и финансирования дальнейшей разработки.
Пожалуйста, посетите http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ для пожертвований.
Это программное обеспечение поставляется БЕЗ КАКИХ-ЛИБО ГАРАНТИЙ. Пожалуйста, нажмите здесь, чтобы увидеть подробную информацию о поддержке, гарантиях и лицензировании.
Для выполнения функций системного администрирования нажмите одну из ссылок в меню слева экрана.
]]>SME Server свободно доступен под Стандартной общественной лицензией (GNU General Public License), что является возможным только благодаря усилиям сообщества SME Server. Тем не менее, доступность и качество SME Server зависит от наших расходов, таких, как оплата хостинга, серверное оборудование и т.д.
Таким образом, мы просим небольшое пожертвование для покрытия расходов и финансирования дальнейшей разработки.
Пожалуйста, посетите https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ для пожертвований.
Это программное обеспечение поставляется БЕЗ КАКИХ-ЛИБО ГАРАНТИЙ. Пожалуйста, нажмите здесь, чтобы увидеть подробную информацию о поддержке, гарантиях и лицензировании.
Для выполнения функций системного администрирования нажмите одну из ссылок в меню слева экрана.
]]>Поддержка и лицензирование
Это программное обеспечение выпущено на условиях указанных на странице Поддержка и лицензирование. ]]>Поддержка и лицензирование
Это программное обеспечение выпущено на условиях указанных на странице Поддержка и лицензирование. ]]>SME Server är fritt tillgänglig under GNU General Public License och är endast möjlig genom ansträngningar av SME Server community. Emellertid så är tillgängligheten och kvalitén på SME Server beroende av uppfyllnad av våra kostnader som exempelvis, hyra, serverhårdvara, etc.
Vi önskar oss därför en gåva för att täcka kostnaderna samt för kommande utveckling.
Besök http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ för att ge en gåva.
Denna mjukvara kommer med ABSOLUT INGEN GARANTI. Klicka här för att se detaljerad information om support, garanti och licensvillkor.
För att genomföra en administrativ åtgärd på systemet, klicka på en av länkarna i menyn till vänster.
]]>SME Server är fritt tillgänglig under GNU General Public License och är endast möjlig genom ansträngningar av SME Server community. Emellertid så är tillgängligheten och kvalitén på SME Server beroende av uppfyllnad av våra kostnader som exempelvis, hyra, serverhårdvara, etc.
Vi önskar oss därför en gåva för att täcka kostnaderna samt för kommande utveckling.
Besök https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ för att ge en gåva.
Denna mjukvara kommer med ABSOLUT INGEN GARANTI. Klicka här för att se detaljerad information om support, garanti och licensvillkor.
För att genomföra en administrativ åtgärd på systemet, klicka på en av länkarna i menyn till vänster.
]]>Hjälp och licensiering
Denna mjukvara är släppt under de villkor som visas på hjälp och licensierings sidan. ]]>Hjälp och licensiering
Denna mjukvara är släppt under de villkor som visas på hjälp och licensierings sidan. ]]>SME Server ถือกำเนิดขึ้นภายใต้ "โลกแห่งอิสระ" ของลิขสิทธิ์แบบ GNU General Public License และจะเป็นแบบเดียวเท่านั้นที่มันจะเป็น และโดยการอุทิศความอุตสาหะพยายามของบรรดาผู้คนในสังคมของ SME Server. อย่างไรก็ตาม คุณสมบัติและคุณภาพของ SME Server ก็สัมพันธ์กับความสามารถในการจ่ายค่าใช้จ่ายต่างๆ เช่น ค่าเช่าโฮส ค่าอุปกรณ์เซอร์ฟเวอร์ และอื่นๆ
โดยเหตุนี้ เราจึงเปิดรับและขอการสนับสนุนโดยการบริจาค ซึ่งไม่ต้องจำเป็นต้องเป็นเงินจำนวนที่มากมาย เพื่อใช้จ่ายในเรื่องเหล่านี้ และเพื่อเป็นทุนในการพัฒนาต่อๆ ไปในอนาคต
โปรดเข้าไปที่ http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ เพื่อให้การบริจาคสนับสนุนแก่เรา
ซอร์ฟแวร์นี้ไม่มีการรับประกันการใช้งานใดๆ โปรด คลิกที่นี่ เพื่อดูข้อมูลในการสนับสนุนการใช้งาน รายละเอียดการรับประกัน และเงื่อนไขลิขสิทธิ์
เลือกงานระบบที่ต้องการจัดการ ทำโดยคลิ๊กลิงค์ที่เมนูด้านซ้ายของคุณ
]]>SME Server ถือกำเนิดขึ้นภายใต้ "โลกแห่งอิสระ" ของลิขสิทธิ์แบบ GNU General Public License และจะเป็นแบบเดียวเท่านั้นที่มันจะเป็น และโดยการอุทิศความอุตสาหะพยายามของบรรดาผู้คนในสังคมของ SME Server. อย่างไรก็ตาม คุณสมบัติและคุณภาพของ SME Server ก็สัมพันธ์กับความสามารถในการจ่ายค่าใช้จ่ายต่างๆ เช่น ค่าเช่าโฮส ค่าอุปกรณ์เซอร์ฟเวอร์ และอื่นๆ
โดยเหตุนี้ เราจึงเปิดรับและขอการสนับสนุนโดยการบริจาค ซึ่งไม่ต้องจำเป็นต้องเป็นเงินจำนวนที่มากมาย เพื่อใช้จ่ายในเรื่องเหล่านี้ และเพื่อเป็นทุนในการพัฒนาต่อๆ ไปในอนาคต
โปรดเข้าไปที่ https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ เพื่อให้การบริจาคสนับสนุนแก่เรา
ซอร์ฟแวร์นี้ไม่มีการรับประกันการใช้งานใดๆ โปรด คลิกที่นี่ เพื่อดูข้อมูลในการสนับสนุนการใช้งาน รายละเอียดการรับประกัน และเงื่อนไขลิขสิทธิ์
เลือกงานระบบที่ต้องการจัดการ ทำโดยคลิ๊กลิงค์ที่เมนูด้านซ้ายของคุณ
]]>การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์
ซอฟต์แวร์นี้ผลิตขึ้นภายใต้เงื่อนไขที่ประกาศไว้ใน การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์ ]]>การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์
ซอฟต์แวร์นี้ผลิตขึ้นภายใต้เงื่อนไขที่ประกาศไว้ใน การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์ ]]>SME Server, GNU Genel Kamu Lisansı altında ve SME Server topluluğu aracılığıyla devam ettirilmektedir. SME Server Linuxun kalitesinin artması ve projenin devam edebilmesi giderlerimize bağlıdır, sunucu ücreti, seunucu donanımı vb.
Bu nedenle, maliyetleri karşılamak için küçük bir bağış bekliyoruz.
Lütfen http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ bağışta bulunun.
Bu yazılımın KESİNLİKE GARANTİSİ YOKTUR. Lütfen buraya tıklayarak destek, garanti ve lisans bilgilerine gözatın.
Sistemi yönetmeye başlamak için ekranın solundaki menüden bir linke tıklayın.
]]>SME Server, GNU Genel Kamu Lisansı altında ve SME Server topluluğu aracılığıyla devam ettirilmektedir. SME Server Linuxun kalitesinin artması ve projenin devam edebilmesi giderlerimize bağlıdır, sunucu ücreti, seunucu donanımı vb.
Bu nedenle, maliyetleri karşılamak için küçük bir bağış bekliyoruz.
Lütfen https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ bağışta bulunun.
Bu yazılımın KESİNLİKE GARANTİSİ YOKTUR. Lütfen buraya tıklayarak destek, garanti ve lisans bilgilerine gözatın.
Sistemi yönetmeye başlamak için ekranın solundaki menüden bir linke tıklayın.
]]>Destek ve Lisanslama
Bu yazılımın kullanım süreci Destek ve Lisanslama sayfasında belirtilmiştir. ]]>Destek ve Lisanslama
Bu yazılımın kullanım süreci Destek ve Lisanslama sayfasında belirtilmiştir. ]]>SME Server在GNU通用公共许可证下免费使用，并通过SME Server社区提供支持。SME Server的可用性和可靠性取决于主机托管环境，服务器硬件配置等等。
因此，我们需要您的捐赠和资助，用于日常开支和深入开发。
请访问http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ 来资助我们。
这是个自由软件。请 点击此处 查看支持细节、保证和许可信息 。
要查看系统管理功能列表，请点击屏幕左侧菜单上的链接。
]]>SME Server在GNU通用公共许可证下免费使用，并通过SME Server社区提供支持。SME Server的可用性和可靠性取决于主机托管环境，服务器硬件配置等等。
因此，我们需要您的捐赠和资助，用于日常开支和深入开发。
请访问https://wiki.koozali.org/donate/ 来资助我们。
这是个自由软件。请 点击此处 查看支持细节、保证和许可信息 。
要查看系统管理功能列表，请点击屏幕左侧菜单上的链接。
]]>支持和许可
此软件根据位于 支持和许可 页面的条款发布。 ]]>支持和许可
此软件根据位于 支持和许可 页面的条款发布。 ]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>支援與授權
此軟體依據位於 支援與授權 頁面的條款發佈。 ]]>支援與授權
此軟體依據位於 支援與授權 頁面的條款發佈。 ]]>Първият метод създава копие на конфигурацията на сървъра и потребителските файлове с данни, и го сваля на локалния компютър чрез браузъра. В момента конфигурацията и файловете с данни са с приблизителен размер $tarsize. Файлът с резервното копие ще бъде около или по-малко от това, в зависимост степента на компресия на данните. Можете да използвате \"Проверка на файл с резервно копие в компютъра\" за да проверите интегритета на файла с резервното копие в локалния компютър.
Методът за резервно копиране на лента използва софтуерен пакет, наречен $module за да създаде резервно копие на целия твърд диск на лента всяка нощ. Това изисква използването на поддържано устройство за лента и касета с лента, която не е защитена срещу запис. Резервното копиране се извършва автоматично в избраното време всяка нощ (с напомняне, което се праща по електронната поща на администратора през деня). В момента твърдият диск съдържа $dumpsize данни.
И двата метода за възстановяване позволяват връщането на конфигурацията и потребителските файлове с данни. В идеалния случай възстановяването трябва да се извърши върху току що (прясно) инсталиран сървър.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Резервното копиране на лента изисква използването на поддържано устройство за ленти. Ще бъде изпратено напомнящо съобщение до администратора, когато настъпи времето посочено за напомняне ако устройството е празно.
]]>Уверете се че сте заредили касетата с исканото резервно копие в устройството преди да продължите.
След приключване на възстановяването трябва да рестартирате сървъра.
]]>Само файлове маркирани със [запазен] са част от резервното копие.
Файловете от резервните копия се проверяват от споделената папка : ]]>
Уверете се че избрали правилното резервно копие по-долу преди да продължите.
След като приключи възстановяването трябва да рестартирате сървъра.
Възстановяването ще стане от следното резервно копие : ]]>Следващи панел ще покаже наличните файлове и папки, така че ще можете да изберете тези, които искате да се възстановяват. За да се ограничи броя на файловете и папките показани в този панел имате възможност да зададете филтриращ израз, който ще бъде зададен като регулярен израз /regex/ спрямо показаните имена.
Отговорността да не възстановявате файлове, които биха нарушили функционирането на сървъра е Ваша.
В момента файловете ще бъдат възстановявани от : ]]>
Добави домейн ]]>
Сигурни ли сте, че желаете да премахнете домейна?
]]>Настройки на фирмения DNS
]]>Делегиран пощенски сървър
Сървъра включва и пълнофункционален пощенски сървър. Въпреки това в някои случаи може да Ви се наложи да предадете обработката на пощата на друга система, посочете тук IP адреса на делегираната система. За нормалната работа оставете това поле празно. ]]>Настройка на ETRN или multi-drop
За ETRN или multi-drop, посочете име или IP адрес на Вашия вторичен пощенски сървър. (Ако се използва стандартен начин за получаване, това поле може да бъде оставено празно.) ]]>SMTP сървър
Сървърът може да достави изходящите съобщения директно (препоръчва се в повечето случаи) или чрез SMTP сървър на интернет доставчик (което се препоръчва, ако връзката с интернет не е надеждна или интернета е домашен). При използване на SMTP сървър на интернет доставчик, посочете името му или IP адреса му долу. Иначе оставете това поле празно. ]]>Получаване на поща
]]>Доставка на e-mail
]]>Сигурни ли сте, че искате да премахнете това име на хост? ]]>
Можете да премахнете всеки информационен слот или да инициализирате паролата му като щракнете на съответната команда срещу информационния слот. Ако информационния слот е показан в червено, това означава че паролата все още не е променена спрямо подразбиращата се и че трябва скоро да се промени.
]]>Всички файлове, принадлежащи към този информационен слот ще бъдат изтрити.
Сигурни ли сте, че искате да премахнете този информационен слот?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server достъпна свободно под лиценза ГНУ General Public License и е единствено възможен благодарение на усилията на общността на SME Server. Въпреки това, наличието и качеството на SME Server зависят от покриването на нашите разходи, като цената за хостване, сървърния хардуер и т.н.
Поради това ние Ви молим малко дарение за да посрещнем разходите и да финансираме по-нататъшното развитие.
Моля, посетете http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ за да направите дарение.
Този софтуер идва без НИКАКВА ГАРАНЦИЯ. Моля, щракнете тук за да видите детайлна информация за поддръжката, гаранцията и лицензирането.
За да извършите функция по системно администриране, щракнете върху някоя от връзките в менюто, разположено в лявата част на екрана.
]]>Щракнете тук за списъка на фунциите за системно администриране.
]]>Добави мрежа ]]>
"Маршрутизатор" трябва да бъде IP адреса на маршрутизатора на локалната мрежа през който допълнителната мрежа се достига. ]]>
Вашият сървър ще предостави права за локален достъп на {$totalHosts} IP адреса в обхвата {$firstAddr} до {$lastAddr}.
Внимание: Сървърът ProFTPd FTP не може да работи с тази нестандартна маска на подмрежа. Вместо това ще бъде използвана по-простата спецификация {$simpleMask}.
]]>Поддръжка и лицензиране
Този софтуер е пуснат според клаузите дадени в страницата Поддръжка и лицензиране. ]]>ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: Неправилното използване на тази функция може сериозно да компрометира сигурността на мрежата Ви. Не използвайте тази функция необмислено и без пълно разбиране на последствията от Вашите действия.
]]>Името на принтера трябва да съдържа само малки букви и цифри, и трябва да започва с малка буква. Например, "hplaser", "epsonlp" и "canonbj" са допустими имена.
]]>Псевдонимите позволяват да задавате други имена за съществуващи потребители или групи. Например, можете зададете псевдоним "webmaster" за групата "webdevelopers" или псевдоним "joe" за потребителя "joseph".
Сървърът автоматично създава псевдоними от вида име.фамилия и име_фамилия за всеки потребител в системата и псевдоним "everyone", който съдържа всички потребители в системата.
Псевдонимите също така позволяват да създавате псевдоними за електронна поща на валидни (виртуални) домейни и потребители. Например, можете да пренасочите "sales@virtualdomain1.com" към потребителя "mary" и "sales@virtualdomain2.com" към потребителя "john". Трябва да създадете домейн или домейни и акаунти на потребителите, преди да създавате псевдоними.
Псевдонимите могат да сочат към други псевдоними, но това е ограничено само до едно ниво. Например, псевдонимът "webmaster" може да сочи към псевдонима "techsupport", който след това да сочи към потребителя "ray". Это полезно, когда один пользователь отвечает за многочисленные функции и сохраняет необходимость изменить псевдонимы, связанные с этим пользователем не раз в том случае, если пользователь уходит из организации.
Вы можете изменить или удалить псевдоним, нажав на соответствующую команду рядом с псевдонимом.
]]>Моля, отбележете, че може да отнеме няколко минути за генерирането на тези отчети
]]>Ако потребителя надвиши "лимита с гратисен период", ще бъдат генерирани предупреждения. Ако този лимит бъде надвишен за повече от седмица или ако бъде надвишен "абсолютния лимит", потребителя няма да може повече да съхранява файлове или да получава поща.
Задавайки '0' за кой да е от лимитите изключва този лимит за съответния потребител.
Дисковото пространство за всеки потребител включва домашната папка на потребителя, електронната поща и всеки файл, чийто собственик е потребителя в информационните слотове. ]]>
Настройки на Secure Shell
Можете да контролирате Secure Shell достъпа до сървъра. Настройката за публичен достъп трябва да се включи само от опитни администратори за отдалечена диагностика и решаване на проблеми. Препоръчваме да оставите тази настройка "Без достъп" освен ако нямате определена причина да я включите. ]]>Настройки на FTP
Можете също да управлявате достъпа чрез FTP до сървъра. Препоръчваме да оставите тази настройка "Без достъп" освен ако нямате определена причина да я включите.Забележка: тези настройки ограничават достъпа до сървъра и са с предимство пред другите настройки, включително и тези за отделните информационни слотове.
]]>Настройки на PPTP
Можете да включите достъпа до сървъра с PPTP. Трябва да оставите тази настройка изключена като зададете стойност числото , освен ако не Ви е нужен достъпа чрез PPTP. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Възможно е да разрешите на машини в отдалечени мрежи до достъпват управлението на сървъра като въведете тези мрежи тук. Използвайте мрежова маска 255.255.255.255 за да ограничите достъпа до определена машина. Всяка машина в посочения обхват ще може да достъпи управлението на сървъра като използва HTTPS.
]]>Серийна конзола
Можете да позволите достъп до конзолата на сървъра от терминал, свързан към серийния порт.]]>Настройки на Telnet
ВНИМАНИЕ: Telnet в момента е разрешен, но тази възможност вече не се поддържа. Telnet от само себе си е несигурен и трябва ба бъде използван само при обстоятелства, когато няма други алтернативи. Трябва да промените настройката на {$NO_ACCESS} и да използвате secure shell ако е нужен отдалечен достъп. След като го забраните, telnet вече няма да се показва на този екран. ]]>Можете да оставите всяко от полетата празно ако не Ви е нужно.
Текстът който ще въведете по-долу ще бъде пренесен на няколко реда за по-добър изглед на web страницата. Оставете празен ред, когато искате да започнете нов абзац. Ако искате да започнете нов ред, без да започнете нов абзац (например след всеки ред на пощенски адрес), тогава въведете следните четири символа
<BR>на мястото където свършва реда.
Не използвайте тази функционалност ако вече сте донастройвали Вашия web сайт, защото тя ще презапише файла "index.htm" в папката на web сайта.
]]>Да продължа ли?
]]>Можете да променяте, заключвате или изтривате всеки акаунт, както и да презадавате паролата за акаунта като кликвате върху линковете в съседство на акаунта.
Ако акаунта е маркиран като заключен, това означава че трябва да се промени паролата му. Моля, отбележете че новосъздадение акаутни са автоматично заключени докато не се промени тяхната парола.
]]>Отбележете, че за всеки нов акаунт ще бъдат създадени по два специални псевдонима. Тези псевдоними предоставят възможността да имате алтернативни пощенски адреси за тези потребители, които включват името и фамилията им, разделени с точка (.) и знак за подчертаване (_). Така че за акаунтът "betty" с име "Betty" и фамилия "Rubble" ще бъдат създадени два псевдонима - betty.rubble и betty_rubble.
Информацията в директорията (отдел, фирма и т.н.) може да бъде променяна спрямо стойностите по подразбиране показани по-долу. Промените ще се отнасят само до този потребител.
]]>Сигурни ли сте, че желаете да заключите този потребител? ]]>
Сигурни ли сте, че искате да премахнете потребителя? ]]>
Невалиден тип на отчета "{$filename}".
]]>Системата е актуална.
Всички актуализации са сложени. ]]>Налични актуализации
Има налични актуализации за системата. Тези актуализации трябва да се сложат възможно най-скоро. ]]>Ако не можете да смените паролата си, защото сте забравили старата, Вашият локален системен администратор може да презададе паролата Ви като използва server manager.
]]>Den første metode danner en kopi af din serverkonfiguration og brugerdata, og giver dig mulighed for gemme sikkerhedskopien på din arbejdsstation via en browser. Dine nuværende serveropsætning og brugerdate fylder ca. $tarsize. Sikkerhedskopien vil være en smule mindre, afhængig af hvor meget data kan komprimeres. Valgmuligheden \"Undersøg sikkerhedskopi til arbejdsstation\" kan bruges til at kontrollere sikkerhedskopien.
Sikkerhedskopi til bånd anvender programmet $module til at lave en sikkerhedskopi af hele harddisken hver nat. Det kræver en understøttet båndstation og et isat bånd, der ikke er skrivebeskyttet. Sikkerhedskopien dannes automatisk på det valgte tidspunkt hver nat (der sendes automatisk en påmindelse til administrator om dagen). P.t. indeholder din hardisk $dumpsize data.
Begge metoder giver dig mulighed for at gendanne dine serveropsætning og dine brugerdata. Ideelt set bør sikkerhedskopien indlæses på en nyinstalleret server.
]]>Bånd backup. Bruger en programpakke ved navn $module til at sikkerhedskopiere hele din disk til bånd hver nat. Det forudsætter en understøttet båndstation og et bånd der ikke er skrivebeskyttet. Sikkerhedskopien udføres automatisk på et fastlagt tidspunkt hver nat (og der sendes automatisk en påmindelse til administrator i løbet af dagen). Aktuelt indeholder din disk $dumpsize af data.
Netværkshare eller flytbart medie. Bruger en programpakke ved navn dar til at sikkerhedskopiere serveropsætning og data til netværksshare eller et lokalt flytbart medie som f.eks. en USB-disk. Du kan indstille antallet af roterende sikkerhedskopier du ønsker at bevare, og antallet af ændringsbackup i hvert sæt. Sikkerhedskopien udføres dagligt på det fastsatte tidspunkt. Aktuelt fylder serveropsætning og data $tarsize ukomprimeret. Der skal være plads til det dobbelte af den komprimerede datamængde på backup mediet.
Backup til pc. Denne metode opretter en kopi af serveropsætning og brugerdata og henter dem til din pc via din web-browser. Aktuelt fylder opsætning og data i alt ca. $tarsize. Sikkerhedskopien vil være lidt mindre afhængig af hvor meget data kan komprimeres. Denne fil kan bruges til gendannelse af serveren fra konsollen, hvis du kopierer filen til et flytbart medie, som f.eks. en USB-disk.
Alle 3 muligheder vil kunne gendanne serveropsætning og data på serveren. Backup til netshare eller flytbart medie kan desuden bruges til at gendanne individuelle filer fra sikkerhedskopien. En fuld gendannelse bør udføres på en nyinstalleret server..
]]>Båndsikkerhedskopiering forudsætter en understøttet båndstation. En advarsel bliver sendt til administrator på det fastlagte tidspunkt, hvis der ikke er bånd i båndstationen.
]]>Du må sikre dig dig, at det rette bånd er indsat i båndstationen inden gendannelse.
Efter gendannelsen skal serveren genstartes.
]]>Kun filer markeret med [Saved] er sikkerhedskopieret.
Filerne i sikkerhedskopien bliver kontrolleret fra den delte mappe: ]]>
Du må sikre dig at du vælger den rigtige sikkerhedskopi inden du fortsætter.
Efter gendannelsen skal serveren genstartes.
Gendannelsen vil ske fra: ]]>Det næste panel vil vise filer og mapper, så du kan vælge dem, der skal gendannes. For at begrænse antallet af viste filer og mapper kan du angive et filterudtryk, tilføjet som regulært udtryk for de viste navne.
Du har ansvaret for ikke at gendanne filer, der vil kunne ødelægge din servers funktioner.
Aktuelt vil filerne gendannes fra: ]]>
Tilføj domæne ]]>
Er du sikker på du ønsker at fjerne domænet?
]]>Virksomheds DNS indstillinger
]]>Delegerede postservere
Din server indholder en komplet postserver med alle funktioner. Ikke desto mindre, hvis du ønsker at uddelegere posthåndteringen til et andet system, så indtast IP-adressen her. For almindelig funktionalitet efterlades feltet blankt. ]]>ETRN og multi-drop indstillinger
For ETRN og multi-drop, angiv værtsnavn eller IPdresse for den sekundære post-server. (bruger du en standard e-postopsætning, kan feltet efterlades tomt.) ]]>SMTP server
Serveren kan levere udgående beskeder direkte til modtageren (anbefalet i de fleste tilfælde) eller du kan levere dem via Internetudbyderens SMTP server (anbefalet hvis du har en upålidelig Internetforbindelse eller bruger TDC). Bruger du Internetudbyderens SMTP server, angiv værtsnavn eller IPadresse nedenfor. Ellers lad feltet stå tomt. ]]>E-post modtagelse
]]>E-post levering
]]>Er du sikker på du ønsker det fjernet? ]]>
Du kan ændre,fjerne eller skifte adgangskoden for en i-bay ved at klikke på det relevante link ud for pågældende i-bay. Vises navnet i rødt er adgangskoden ikke blevet skiftet. Det bør gøres snarest.
]]>Alle filer i denne i-bay vil blive slettet.
Er du sikker på du ønsker at slette denne i-bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server er frit tilgængelig under GNU General Public Licens, hvilket kun er muligt gennem SME Server gruppens indsats. Ikke desto mindre er adgangen til, og kvaliteten af, SME Server afhængig af, at omkostninger til hosting, serverhardware mm. dækkes.
Derfor anmoder vi om bidrag til at dække disse omkostninger og til at understøtte den videre udvikling.
a) Hvis du er en skole, en kirke, en almennyttig organisation eller en person som bruger SME til private formål, vil vi sætte pris på at du bidrager, indenfor dine muligheder, til udgifterne til hosting, vedligehold og udvikling.
b) Hvis du er en virksomhed eller en konsulent og du anvender SME i forbindelse med dit arbejde til at skabe indtægter, forventer vi at du bidrager med et beløb i forhold til den indtægt det skaber og antallet af de servere du har etableret. Hjælp venligst projektet
Denne software er UDEN NOGEN FORM FOR GARANTI. Klik venligst her for at se detaljerede oplysninger om support, garanti og licens.
For at udføre system administration, klik på et af linkene i menuen i venstre side af skærmen.
]]>Klik her for at få vist en liste over system administrations funktioner.
]]>Tilføj netværk ]]>
"Router" bør være IP-adressen på den router på lokalnetværket, der giver adgang til det andet netværk. ]]>
Serveren vil tildele lokal adgangsret til {$totalHosts} IP-adresser i området {$firstAddr} til {$lastAddr}.
Advarsel: ProFTPd FTP-server kan ikke håndtere denne ikke-standard subnetmaske. {$simpleMask} vil blive brugt i stedet for.
]]>Support og licensinfo
TDenne software er frigivet under betingelser angivet i Support og licensinfo page. ]]>ADVARSEL: Fejlagtig brug af denne funktion kan kompromittere dit netværks sikkerhed. Brug denne funktion med forsigtighed og ikke uden at forstå hvad det indebærer.
]]>Printernavne må kun indeholde små bogstaver og tal og skal starte med et lille bogstav. F.eks. er "hplaser", "epsonlp" og "canonbj" gyldige navne.
]]>Pseudonymer tillader dig at oprette andre navne for brugere og grupper. F.eks. hvis du ønsker at oprette et pseudonym "webmaster" for din gruppe af "webudviklere" eller et pseudonym "joe" for "joseph".
Serveren opretter automatisk pseudonymer af formen fornavn.efternavn og fornavn_efternavn for enhver bruger i systemet og pseudonymet "everyone", som indeholder alle bruger i systemet.
Pseudonymer tillader dig også e-postalias for gyldige (virtuelle) domæner & brugere. F.eks. kan du videresende "salg@virtueltdomæne1.dk" til bruger "mary" og "salg@virtueltdomæne2.dk" til bruger "john". Du er nødt til at oprette domæner og brugere, inden du laver alias for dem.
Pseudonymer kan også videresende til andre pseudonymer, men det er begrænset til et yderligere niveau. F.eks. kan pseudonym "webmaster" videresende til pseudonymet "techsupport" som så igen videresender til den specifikke bruger "ray". Dette er ret anvendeligt når en virksomhed har medarbejdere, der udfylder forskellige funktioner. Man undgår at skulle skifte pseudonymerne, der er associeret med denne bruger, adskillige gange, når brugeren forlader virksomheden.
Du kan ændre eller fjerne pseudonymer ved at klikke på den tilhørende kommando ud for pseudonymet.
]]>Venligst bemærk at det kan tage adskillige minutter at opbygge disse rapporter
]]>Hvis brugeren overskrider "Henstandsperiode", vil der blive udsendt en advarsel. Overskrides denne grænse i mere end en uge eller hvis "Absolut grænse" bliver nået, vil brugeren ikke kunne gemme mere på serveren og heller ikke modtage mere e-post.
Indstilles begge værdier til '0' vil der ikke være nogen begrænsning for brugeren.
Diskpladsen for hver bruger omfatter e-post, indholdet i hjemmemappen, samt hvad brugeren har gemt i diverse i-bays. ]]>
'Secure Shell' indstillinger
Du kan styre Secure Shell adgang til serveren. Offentlig adgang bør kun gives af erfarne administratorer til fjern fejlsøgning og fejlretning. Vi anbefaler indstillingen "Ingen adgang" medmindre du har specielle grunde til andet. ]]>FTP-indstillinger
Du kan styre FTP adgang til serveren. Vi anbefaler indstillingen Ingen adgang medmindre du har specielle grunde til at gøre andet.Bemærk: Disse indstillinger begænser adgangen til serveren og overskiver andre indstillinger, også de individuelle indstillinger for i-bays.
]]>VPNadgang
Du kan tillade VPNadgang til din server. Du bør efterlade denne funktion deaktiveret ved at sætte værdien til tallet 0, medmindre du har behov for VPNadgang. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Det er muligt, at tillade værter på fjerne netværker adgang til Serverstyringen, ved at tilføje disse netværker her. Enhver vært indenfor det angivne område vil være i stand til at få adgang til Serverstyringen ved at bruge HTTPS. Brug subnetmaske 255.255.255.255 for at begrænse adgangen til en bestemt vært.
]]>Seriel konsol
Du kan tillade adgang til serverkonsollen fra en terminal tilsluttet serverens serielle port.]]>Telnet indstillinger
ADVARSEL: Telnet er pt. tændt, men denne funktion er ikke længere understøttet. Telnet er grundlæggende usikker og bør kun anvendes når der ikke er andre alternativer. Du bør ændre indstillingen til {$NO_ACCESS} og bruge secure shell når fjernadgang er påkrævet. Slås funktionen fra, vil telnet ikke længere dukke op på dette skærmbillede. ]]>Du kan efterlade ethvert felt blankt, hvis du ikke har brug for det.
Den tekst som du indsætter nedenfor vil blive ombrudt, så den præsenteres pænere på din hjemmeside. Indsæt en blank linje hver gang du ønsker at starte et nyt afsnit. Hvis du vil starte en ny linje, uden at starte et nyt afsnit (for eksempel efter hver linje i en postadresse), så indtast den 4-anslagssekvens
<BR>der hvor du ønsker et linjeskift.
Brug ikke denne mulighed hvis du allerede har tilpasset din hjemmeside, da den vil overskrive filen "index.htm" i din hjemmesidemappe.
]]>Ønsker du at fortsætte?
]]>Du kan ændre, låse, fjerne brugerkonti eller skifte adgangskoden ved at klikke på den aktuelle kommando ud for brugernavnet.
Hvis brugerkontoen er markeret som låst, betyder det, at brugerens adgangskode skal skiftes. Bemærk venligst at nyoprettede konti automatisk er låst indtil adgangskoden er skiftet.
]]>Bemærk, at der vil blive dannet 2 specielle pseudonymer for hvert nyt brugernavn. Disse pseudonymer giver brugeren mulighed for alternative e-postadresser, som indeholder brugerens fornavn og efternavn, adskilt med et punktum (.) og et understregningstegn (_). For brugernavnet "betty" med fornavn "Betty" og efternavn "Rubble" dannes 2 pseudonymer, betty.rubble og betty_rubble.
Adresseinformation (afdeling, virksomhed og så videre) kan ændres fra de viste standardværdier. Ændringerne gælder kun den enkelte bruger.
]]>Er du sikker på, at du vil låse denne konto? ]]>
Er du sikker på, at du ønsker at fjerne denne brugerkonto? ]]>
Ugyldig rapporttype "{$filename}".
]]>Dette system er opdateret.
Alle opdateringer er installeret. ]]>Der er opdateringer tilgængelig
Der er opdateringer tilgængelig for dit system. Disse bør installeres snarest muligt. ]]>Har du glemt din tidligere adgangskode, kan du kontakte systemadministratoren, som kan skifte din adgangskode ved at bruge Serverstyringen.
]]>Die erste Methode erzeugt eine Kopie der Servereinstellungen sowie der Benutzerdaten und lädt diese über den Webbrowser auf den Arbeitsplatzrechner. Im Moment beträgt die Größe Ihrer Einstellungen und Benutzerdaten ungefähr$tarsize. Die Sicherung wird etwas kleiner als dieser Wert, abhängigwie die Daten komprimierbar sind. Mit \"Überprüfung der Sicherungsdatei\" kann die Datei noch einmal überprüft werden.
Die Bandsicherungmethode benutzt ein Softwarepaket mit dem Namen $module, um die Daten der Festplatte jede Nacht zu sichern. Dafür wird ein Bandsicherungslaufwerk und ein nicht schreibgeschutztes Band benötigt. Die Sicherung wird automatisch zu der angegebenen Zeit durchgeführt, sowie im Laufe des Tages eine E-Mail an den Admin geschickt. Aktuell sind auf Festplatten Ihres Servers $dumpsize an Daten gespeichert.
]]>Bandsicherung. Diese Methode verwendet ein Software-Paket namens $module um jede Nacht die gesamte Server-Festplatte auf Band zu sichern. Dies erfordert ein unterstütztes Bandlaufwerk und ein nicht schreibgeschütztes Band. Die Sicherung wird automatisch zur gewählten Zeit in der Nacht durchgeführt (eine Erinnerung wird automatisch während des Tages an den Administrator gemailt). Zur Zeit enthält Ihre Festplatte $dumpsize.
Workstation-Sicherung. Diese Methode verwendet ein Software-Paket namens dar, um Ihre Server-Konfiguration und Daten auf eine Netzwerkfreigabe oder eine lokale Wechselfestplatte (USB-Festplatte) zu sichern. Sie können bestimmen, wie viele rotierende Sätze der Sicherungen aufbewahrt werden und wie viele inkrementelle Sicherungen in jedem Satz enthalten sind. Die Sicherung wird automatisch täglich zu der ausgewählten Zeit durchgeführt. Derzeitige Gesamtgröße der Konfigurationsdateien und Daten unkomprimiert ca. $tarsize. Komprimiert müssen die Daten zweimal auf das Sicherungsmedium passen.
Sicherung auf Arbeitsplatzrechner. Diese Methode erstellt eine Kopie der Serverkonfiguration und Benutzerdaten und lädt diese mit Hilfe des Web-Browsers auf Ihren Arbeitsplatzrechner. Derzeitige Datenmenge ca. $tarsize. Die Sicherungsdatei kann je nach Komprimierungsgrad etwas kleiner sein. Diese Datei kann verwendet werden, um die Serverdaten von der Konsole wiederherstellen, wenn Sie auf eine lokale USB-Festplatte kopiert wird.
Mit allen Sicherungsmethoden können Sie Ihre Konfigurations- und Benutzerdateien wiederherstellen. Die Workstation-Sicherung ermöglicht es individuelle Dateien wiederherzustellen. Im Idealfall kann eine vollständige Rücksicherung auf einem frisch installierten Server durchgeführt werden.
]]>Die Bandsicherung benötigt ein unterstütztes Bandlaufwerk. Sollte das Bandlaufwerk leer sein, wird eine Warnmeldung zum gesetzten Zeitpunkt an den Administrator gesendet.
]]>Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das richtige Band im Bandlaufwerk eingelegt wurde, bevor Sie beginnen.
Nach der Wiederherstellung muss der Server neu gestartet werden.
]]>Nur Dateien gekennzeichnet mit [Saved] sind in der Sicherung enthalten.
Sicherungsdateien aus folgendem Verzeichnis werden geprüft: ]]>Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das richtige Band eingelegt wurde, bevor Sie beginnen.
Nach der Wiederherstellung muß der Server neu gestartet werden.
Wiederherstellung von: ]]>Die nächste Seite zeigt Ihnen die verfügbaren Dateien und Verzeichnisse, aus denen Sie auswählen können. Um ggf. die Anzahl der Dateien und Verzeichnisse in der Anzeige zu beschränken können Sie jetzt eine Filterregel erstellen, die auf die anzuzeigenden Namen wirkt.
Achtung: Schließen Sie Dateien, die die Funktionssicherheit Ihres Servers gefährden ggf. mit Nicht Rücksichern aus.
Aktuell werden die Dateien zurückgesichert von: ]]>
Warnung : Wenn Sie ein Verzeichnis selektieren werden alle enthaltenen Dateien und Verzeichnisse wiederhergestellt. Standardmäßig wird die neueste Version der ausgewählten Dateien wiederhergestellt, falls Sie aber ein Datum im Format [ [ [JJJJ/]mm/]tt-]hh:mm[:ss] spezifizieren, wird der Prozess nur die neueste vor dem gegebenen Datum geänderte Version wiederherstellen. ]]>
Sind Sie sicher, dass Sie die Domäne entfernen wollen ?
]]>Zentrale DNS-Einstellungen
]]>Externer Mailserver
Ihr Server verfügt über einen kompletten E-Mail Server mit allen Funktionen. Jedoch aus verschieden Gründen kann es notwendig sein, die Mailserver-Funktion eines anderen Mailserver zu nutzen. Geben Sie hierfür die IP Adresse des anderen Mailservers unten an. Für eine normale Installation lassen Sie bitte das Feld leer. ]]>Einstellungen für ETRN oder Multidrop
Geben Sie für ETRN oder Multidrop den Hostnamen oder die IP Adresse Ihres Sekundären Mailservers an. Wenn Sie die Standard E-Mail Einstellungen verwenden, kann dieses Feld leer bleiben. ]]>SMTP Server
Der Server kann die ausgehenden Mitteilungen direkt selbst versenden (in den meisten Fällen empfohlen) oder aber über den SMTP Server Ihres Internet Providers. Der Versand über einen anderen SMTP Server wird empfohlen, wenn Sie keine gute Anbindung an das Internet haben, nur über eine langsame Einwahlverbindung verfügen oder wenn Sie eine eigene Domäne mit dynamischen DNS selbst betreiben. Wenn Sie den SMTP Server Ihres Internet Providers verwenden, müssen Sie den Hostnamen oder die IP-Adresse unten eingeben. Ansonsten lassen Sie bitte das Feld leer. ]]>E-Mail Empfang
]]>E-Mail Auslieferung
]]>Sie können eine Benutzergruppe ändern oder löschen, indem Sie unter Aktion den entsprechenden Link anklicken. ]]>
Sind Sie sicher, dass Sie den Hostnamen entfernen wollen ?
]]>Information-Bays (i-bays) sind eine Spezialität des SME-Servers. Hier können mit einer einzigen Mimik Verzeichnisse angelegt werden, die für die Veröffentlichung im Internet oder für die Verwendung im lokalen Netz bestimmt sind. Der SME-Server legt dazu für jedes i-bay die Unterverzeichnisse files, html und cgi-bin an, die je nach Einsatzzweck verwendet werden.
I-bays können verändert, gelöscht oder das Kennwort des i-bays zurückgesetzt werden, indem Sie unter Aktion den entsprechenden Link anklicken.
Wenn das i-bay in rot angezeigt wird, wurde das Standard-Kennwort noch nicht geändert und sollte sobald wie möglich neu eingegeben werden
Alle Dateien im i-bay werden gelöscht.
Sind Sie sicher, daß Sie das i-bay löschen wollen ?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server ist unter der GNU General Public License frei verfügbar und wird durch die Bemühungen der SME Server Community stetig weiterentwickelt. Allerdings verursacht es Kosten, SME Server mit hoher Qualität verfügbar zu machen, z. B. durch Hosting, Server-Hardware, usw.
Daher wird um Spenden zur Finanzierung der Kosten und Weiterentwicklung gebeten.
a) Wenn Sie eine Schule, eine Kirche, eine gemeinnützige Organisation oder eine Privatperson sind, würden wir uns über einen Beitrag innerhalb Ihres finanziellen Rahmens freuen, der mithilft die Kosten für Hosting, Wartung und Entwicklung zu decken.
b) Wenn Sie ein Unternehmen sind oder im Rahmen Ihrer Tätigkeit Gewinne erzielen, erwarten wir von Ihnen eine angemessene Spende im Einklang mit der Höhe Ihrer Gewinne und der Anzahl der eingesetzten Server. Bitte besuchen Sie für eine Spende
Diese Software wird ABSOLUT OHNE GARANTIE zur Verfügung gestellt. Bitte schauen Sie sich hier die ausführlichen Informationen zu Support, Garantie und Lizenzen an.
Um Funktion des Server-Managers aufzurufen, klicken Sie bitte auf einen der Menüpunkte auf der linken Seite des Bildschirms.
]]>Klicken Sie hier um Funktion des Server-Managers aufzurufen.
]]>"Router" sollte die IP-Adresse des Routers enthalten, über welchen Sie das zusätzliche Netzwerk (Internet) erreichen können.
]]>Ihr Server stellt den lokalen Zugang für {$totalHosts} in einem IP-Adressbereich von {$firstAddr} bis {$lastAddr} zur Verfügung.
Warnung: Der ProFTPd FTP Server kann die nicht standartmäßige Subnetz-Maske nicht verwenden. Die einfachere Angabe {$simpleMask} wird statt dessen benutzt. ]]>
Unterstützung und Lizenzen
Diese Software ist unter den Bedingungen veröffentlicht, die Sie unter der Unterstützung und Lizenzen Seite nachlesen können. ]]>WARNUNG: Eine falsche Anwendung dieser Funktion stellt ein grosses Sicherheitsrisiko dar und setzt Ihr Netzwerk erheblichen Gefahren aus. Benutzen Sie diese Funktion nicht leichtfertig, ohne das Sie diese Funktion richtig verstehen.
]]>Der Druckername darf nur Kleinbuchstaben und Nummern enthalten und sollte mit einem Kleinbuchstaben beginnen. Zum Beispiel sind "hplaser", "epsonlp" und "canonbj" erlaubt, jedoch wird "HP Laser Jet", "Canon BubbleJet" oder "HP JetDirect Printer" nicht akzeptiert.
]]>Der Server erzeugt automatisch eine E-Mail Adresse für jede Gruppe. Wenn Sie für eine Liste von Benutzern eine E-Mail Adresse erstellen wollen, fassen Sie diese Benutzer in einer Gruppe zusammen.
Der Server erstellt automatisch die Pseudonyme Vorname.Nachname sowie Vorname_Nachname für jeden Benutzer. Es wird außerdem ein Pseudonym everyone erstellt, in welchem alle Benutzer des Systems enthalten sind.
Sie können ein Pseudonym ändern oder löschen, indem Sie unter Aktion den entsprechenden Link anklicken.
]]>Sie können auch Email Aliase für Konten und (virtuelle) Domänen, die auf diesem Server gültig sind, anlegen. Zum Beispiel kann "fred@virtualdomain.com" zu "maria" (oder zu einem anderen gültigen Benutzernamen) weitergeleitet werden.
]]>Bitte bedenken Sie, dass die Erstellung dieser Berichte einige Minuten dauern kann.
]]>Wenn ein Benutzer das "Limit mit Gnadenfrist" erreicht, wird eine Warnung erzeugt. Wird dieses Limit für mehr als eine Woche überschritten oder der Benutzer erreicht das "Absolute Limit", können von Ihm keine Dateien mehr gespeichert werden. Dieser Benutzer erhält auch keine E-Mails mehr.
Sobald '0' eingegeben wird, werden alle Limits für diesen Benutzer 'abgeschaltet'.
Der Speicherplatz für den Benutzer beinhaltet das Home-Verzeichnis, E-Mails und alle Dateien, die diesem Benutzer in den i-bays gehören.
]]>Einstellung für sicheren SSH-Zugang
Sie können den Zugang zu Ihrem Server per sicherem SSH gestatten. Der Öffentliche Zugang sollte nur von erfahrenen Admins für Fernzugriffsprobleme sowie zur Fehlersuche aktiviert werden. Wir empfehlen den Parameter auf "Kein Zugang" eingestellt zu lassen, außer Sie haben besondere Gründe, dies zu ändern. ]]>FTP Einstellungen
Sie können auch den FTP Zugang zu Ihrem Server gestatten. Wir empfehlen jedoch diesen Parameter auf "Keinen Zugang" zu belassen, außer Sie haben besondere Gründe, dies zu ändern.Anmerkung: Diese Einstellungen begrenzen den Zugang zu Ihrem Server und überschreiben andere Einstellungen, auch die für einzelne i-bays.
]]>PPTP Einstellungen
Sie können den PPTP Zugang zu Ihrem Server erlauben.. Sie sollten diese Funktion durch Eingabe einer 0 deaktivieren, außer Sie benötigen den PPTP Zugang. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Es ist möglich, Computern aus anderen Netzwerken den Zugriff auf den Server Manager zu erlauben. Hierzu geben Sie bitte die Daten dieser Netzwerke unten ein. Verwenden Sie in der Subnetz-Maske 255.255.255.255 um den Zugang auf einen bestimmten Host zu beschränken. Jeder Host im spezifizierten Bereich kann den Server Manager über https erreichen.
]]>Serielle Konsole
Sie können den Zugang zu der Server-Konsole über die serielle Schnittstelle des Servers von einem Terminal aus erlauben. ]]>Telnet Einstellungen
WARNUNG: Telnet ist zurzeit aktiviert, aber diese Funktion wird nicht weiter unterstützt. Telnet ist schon an sich sehr unsicher und sollte nur dort verwendet werden, wo keine vernünftigen Alternativen vorhanden sind. Sie sollten die Option auf {$NO_ACCESS} setzen und sollten eine sichere Datenübertragung (SSH) wählen, wenn der Fernzugriff benötigt wird. Wenn telnet einmal deaktiviert würde, steht die Funktion auf dieser Seite nicht mehr zur Verfügung. ]]>Sie können auch alle Felder leer lassen, wenn Sie diese nicht benötigen.
Der eingegebene Text ist für ein besseres Aussehen Ihrer Webseite zeilengebunden. Lassen Sie immer eine Leerzeile, wenn Sie einen neuen Absatz beginnen, damit der Test übersichtlicher wird. Benötigen Sie einen Zeilenumbruch ohne einen neuen Absatz zu beginnen (z.B. nach Eingabe eine Mail Adresse) geben Sie folgende vier Zeichen
<BR>ein, wo Sie den Zeilenumbruch haben wollen.
Benutzen Sie nicht diese Option, wenn Sie bereits Ihre eigene kundenspezifische Webseite angelegt haben, da die Datei "index.htm" in Ihrem Webseiten Verzeichnis überschrieben wird.
]]>Wollen Sie fortfahren ?
]]>Sie können jedes Konto ändern, sperren, löschen oder das Kennwort zurücksetzen, indem Sie unter Aktion den entsprechenden Link anklicken.
Wenn das Konto als gesperrt markiert ist, muss das Kennwort des Benutzers zurückgesetzt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie, dass neu angelegte Konten automatisch gesperrt sind, bis das Kennwort geändert wird. ]]>Beachten Sie, dass für jedes Benutzerkonto zwei Pseudonyme angelegt werden. Diese Pseudonyme stellen alternative Links zum E-Mailkonto für den Benutzer zur Verfügung. Diese enthalten den Vor- und Zunamen getrennt durch einen Punkt (.) und einen Unterstrich (_). Das Konto "betty" mit Vorname "Betty" und Zuname "Rubble" hat die Pseudonyme betty.rubble und betty_rubble.
Die LDAP Verzeichnisinformationen (Abteilung, Firma, etc.) können unten geändert werden. Änderungen betreffen nur dieses Benutzerkonto.
]]>
Dies bedeutet, dass dieser Benutzer sich nicht mehr einloggen oder E-Mails empfangen kann. Alle ankommenden E-Mails werden weiterhin gespeichert und/oder an eine externe E-Mail Adresse weitergeleitet, wenn dies eingestellt wurde. Das Konto kann durch Eingabe eines neuen Kennworts wieder aktiviert werden, jedoch steht das zuvor eingegebene Kennwort nicht mehr zur Verfügung.
Wollen Sie dieses Konto wirklich sperren ? ]]>
Wollen Sie dieses Konto wirklich löschen ? ]]>
Diese Funktion steht beim Herunterladen von Log Dateien nicht zur Verfügung.
]]>Ungültiger Berichtstyp "{$filename}".
]]>Sie sollten diese Einstellung auf Nein belassen, wenn Sie keine fundierten Kenntnisse in Windows-Konfigurationseinstellungen für Netzwerke haben oder Sie nicht wissen, ob Sie diese Funktion überhaupt benötigen. ]]>
Dieses System ist auf dem neuesten Stand.
Alle Updates sind installiert. ]]>Erhältliche Updates
Für Ihr System sind Updates erhältlich. Diese Updates sollten so schnell wie möglich installiert werden. ]]>Wenn Sie Ihr Kennwort nicht ändern können, da Sie ihr altes vergessen haben, kann der System-Administrator über den Server-Manager dieses zurücksetzen.
]]>Η πρώτη μέθοδος δημιουργεί ένα αντίγραφο των ρυθμίσεων παραμέτρων του διακομιστή σας και των αρχείων δεδομένων των χρηστών το οποίο αποστέλλει (downloads) στην τοπική επιφάνεια εργασίας σας μέσω του περιηγητή ιστοσελίδων σας (web browser). Επί του παρόντος οι ρυθμίσεις παραμέτρων και τα αρχεία δεδομένων των χρηστών ανέρχονται συνολικά σε περίπου $tarsize. Το αντίγραφο ασφαλείας θα είναι κατά τι μικρότερο από αυτό, αναλόγως πόσο συμπιέσιμα είναι τα δεδομένα. Η επιλογή \"Επιβεβαίωση αντιγράφου ασφαλείας επιφάνειας εργασίας\" μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί για τον έλεγχο της ακεραιότητας του αρχείου αντιγράφου ασφαλείας της επιφάνειας εργασίας.
για να δημιουργεί κάθε βράδυ ένα αντίγραφο ασφαλείας ολόκληρου του σκληρού σας δίσκου σε ταινία. Τούτο απαιτεί την ύπαρξη ενός υποστηριζόμενου οδηγού ταινίας και μίας ταινίας χωρίς προστασία εγγραφής. Η αντιγραφή ασφαλείας εκτελείται αυτόματα την προεπιλεγμένη ώρα κάθε βράδυ (με μία υπενθύμιση που αυτόματα αποστέλλεται στον διαχειριστή μέσω ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας κατά την διάρκεια της ημέρας). Την στιγμή αυτή ο σκληρός σας δίσκος περιέχει $dumpsize δεδομένων.
Και οι δύο μέθοδοι επαναφοράς σας επιτρέπουν να επαναφέρετε τα αρχεία ρυθμίσεων παραμέτρων και δεδομένων χρηστών. Ιδανικά, η πλήρης επαναφορά θα πρέπει να εκτελείται σε διακομιστή πρόσφατα εγκατεστημένο.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Το τελευταίο αρχείο που περιλαμβάνεται στο αντίγραφο ασφαλείας πρέπει να είναι το αρχείο με όνομα "smbpasswd".
]]>Η αντιγραφή ασφαλείας σε ταινία απαιτεί έναν υποστηριζόμενο οδηγό ταινίας. Ένα προειδοποιητικό μήνυμα θα αποσταλεί στον διαχειριστή την καθορισμένη ώρα υπενθύμισης αν ο οδηγός ταινίας είναι κενός.
]]>Επιβεβαιώστε ότι έχετε φορτώσει την επιθυμητή ταινία στον οδηγό πριν συνεχίσετε.
Μετά την ολοκλήρωση της επαναφοράς πρέπει να επανεκκινήσετε τον διακομιστή.
]]>Θα δείτε όλα τα αρχεία της επιλεγμένης αντιγραφής ασφαλείας.
Επιβεβαιώνονται αρχεία αντιγραφής ασφαλείας από κοινόχρηστο φάκελλο : ]]>Εξασφαλίσατε ότι έχετε επιλέξει το σωστό αντίγραφο ασφαλείας προς επαναφορά προτού να προχωρήσετε.
Μετά την ολοκλήρωση της επαναφοράς πρέπει να επανεκκινήσετε τον διακομιστή.
Η επαναφορά θα γίνει από το αντίγραφο ασφαλείας : ]]>Στην επόμενη οθόνη θα εμφανισθούν όλα τα διαθέσιμα αρχεία και κατάλογοι, ώστε να επιλέξετε τα προς επαναφορά. Για τον περιορισμό του πλήθους των εμφανιζόμενων αρχείων και καταλόγων στην οθόνη αυτή, έχετε τη δυνατότητα να εισάγετε μία συνθήκη φίλτρου, η οποία θα εφαρμοσθεί ως κανόνας επιλογής στα εμφανιζόμενα ονόματα.
Έχετε την ευθύνη της μη επαναφοράς αρχείων τα οποία θα μπορούσαν να διακόψουν τη λειτουργία του διακομιστή σας
Στην παρούσα φάση, η επαναφορά αρχείων θα γίνει από : ]]>
Προσθήκη τομέα ]]>
Είστε σίγουροι ότι θέλετε να διαγράψετε το συγκεκριμένο τομέα;
]]>Ρυθμίσεις Εταιρικού Διακομιστή DNS
]]>Ανάθεση λειτουργιών διακομιστή αλληλογραφίας
Ο διακομιστής σας περιλαμβάνει έναν διακομιστή αλληλογραφίας με όλες τις δυνατότητες. Ωστόσο, εάν για οποιονδήποτε λόγο, επιθυμείτε να αναθέσετε τη λειτουργία επεξεργασίας ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας σε άλλο σύστημα, ορίστε την διεύθυνση IP του εν λόγω συστήματος εδώ. Για κανονική λειτουργία, αφήστε αυτό το πεδίο κενό. ]]>Ρυθμίσεις λειτουργίας ETRN ή multi-drop
Για λειτουργία ETRN ή multi-drop, ορίστε τη δικτυακή ονομασία του διακομιστή ή την διεύθυνση IP του δευτερεύοντος διακομιστή αλληλογραφίας. (Αν χρησιμοποιείτε τη συνήθη εγκατάσταση ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας, αυτό το πεδίο μπορεί να αφεθεί κενό.) ]]>Ο διακομιστής SMTP
μπορεί να παραδώσει τα εξερχόμενα μηνύματα απευθείας στους προορισμούς τους (συνιστάται στις περισσότερες περιπτώσεις) ή μέσω του διακομιστή SMTP του παρόχου διαδικτύου σας (συνιστάται αν έχετε μια μη αξιόπιστη σύνδεση στο διαδίκτυο ή χρησιμοποιείτε μία οικιακή υπηρεσία διαδικτύου). Εάν χρησιμοποιείτε τον διακομιστή SMTP του παρόχου διαδικτύου σας, προσδιορίστε τη δικτυακή ονομασία του Η/Υ ή την διεύθυνση IP παρακάτω. Διαφορετικά, αφήστε αυτό το πεδίο κενό. ]]>Λήψη ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας
]]>Αποστολή ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας
]]>Είστε σίγουροι ότι θέλετε να τη διαγράψετε; ]]>
Μπορείτε να διαγράψετε οποιοδήποτε information bay ή να αρχικοποιήσετε (reset) τον κωδικό πρόσβασης κάνοντας κλικ στην αντίστοιχη εντολή δίπλα στο i-bay. Αν το information bay εμφανίζετε με κόκκινο, αυτό σημαίνει ότι ο κωδικός πρόσβασης δεν έχει ακόμη αλλάξει από τον αρχικό και απαιτείται σύντομα αλλαγή.
]]>Όλα τα αρχεία που ανήκουν σε αυτό το i-bay θα διαγραφούν.
Είστε σίγουροι ότι θέλετε να διαγράψετε το συγκεκριμένο i-bay;
]]>- {$vhostList}
Ο SME Server είναι ελεύθερα διαθέσιμος με άδεια χρήσης ευρέος κοινού GNU κάτι που καθίσταται δυνατό μόνον μέσα από τις προσπάθειες της κοινότητας SME Server. Παρ' όλα αυτά , η διαθεσιμότητα και ποιότητα του SME Server εξαρτώνται από την δυνατότητα κάλυψης των δαπανών μας, όπως π.χ. δαπάνες φιλοξενίας, αγοράς εξυπηρετητών, κ.λ.π.
Ως εκ τούτου, ζητάμε μια μικρή δωρεά για την αντιμετώπιση των δαπανών και την χρηματοδότηση της παραπέρα ανάπτυξης.
Παρακαλούμε επισκεφθείτε το http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ για να κάνετε τη δωρεά σας.
Το παρόν λογισμικό ΔΕΝ συνοδεύεται από ΚΑΜΙΑ ΑΠΟΛΥΤΩΣ ΕΓΓΥΗΣΗ. Παρακαλούμε κάντε κλικ εδώ για να βρείτε λεπτομερείς πληροφορίες σχετικά με υποστήριξη, εγγύηση και αδειοδότηση.
Για να εκτελέσετε κάποια λειτουργία διαχείρισης συστήματος, κάντε κλικ σε έναν από τους συνδέσμους του μενού που βρίσκεται στην αριστερή πλευρά της οθόνης σας.
]]>κάντε κλικ εδώ για ένα πίνακα λειτουργιών διαχείρισης συστήματος.
]]>Προσθήκη δικτύου ]]>
Ως "Δρομολογητής" πρέπει να ορισθεί η διεύθυνση IP του δρομολογητή του τοπικού σας δικτύου δια μέσω του οποίου παρέχεται πρόσβαση στο πρόσθετο δίκτυο. ]]>
Ο διακομιστής σας θα χορηγήσει τα τοπικά προνόμια πρόσβασης στις {$totalHosts} διευθύνσεις IP εντός της περιοχής από {$firstAddr} έως {$lastAddr}.
Προειδοποίηση: ο διακομιστής FTP ProFTPd δεν μπορεί να χειριστεί αυτήν την εξειδικευμένη μάσκα υποδικτύου. Η απλούστερη προδιαγραφή {$simpleMask} θα χρησιμοποιηθεί αντ' αυτής.
]]>Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών
Αυτό το λογισμικό διανέμεται υπό τους όρους που παρατίθενται στη σελίδα Υποστήριξη και χορήγηση αδειών. ]]>ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Η κακή χρήση αυτής της δυνατότητας μπορεί να επηρεάσει σοβαρά την ασφάλεια του δικτύου σας. Μην χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτήν τη δυνατότητα απερίσκεπτα, ή χωρίς να καταλάβετε πλήρως τις επιπτώσεις των ενεργειών σας.
]]>Η ονομασία του εκτυπωτή πρέπει να περιέχει μόνο πεζά γράμματα και αριθμούς και να αρχίζει με πεζό γράμμα. Για παράδειγμα οι ονομασίες "hplaser", "epsonlp", καί "canonbj" αποτελούν έγκυρες επιλογές.
]]>Τα ψευδώνυμα επιτρέπουν σε σας να δημιουργήσετε άλλα ονόματα για τους υπάρχοντες χρήστες ή τις ομάδες. Παραδείγματος χάριν, μπορείτε να θελήσετε να δημιουργήσετε ένα ψευδώνυμο "webmaster" για την ομάδα "webdevelopers" σας ή ένα ψευδώνυμο "Joe" για τον χρήστη "Joseph".
Ο διακομιστής δημιουργεί αυτόματα ψευδώνυμα από το όνομα.επώνυμο και όνομα_επώνυμο για κάθε χρήστη στο σύστημα και ένα ψευδώνυμο "everyone" που περιέχει όλους τους χρήστες του συστήματος.
Τα ψευδώνυμα επίσης σας επιτρέπουν να δημιουργήσετε ψευδώνυμα ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας για έγκυρους (εικονικούς) τομείς & χρήστες. Για παράδειγμα μπορείτε να προωθήσετε το "sales@virtualdomain1.com" στο χρήστη "mary" και το "sales@virtualdomain2.com" στο χρήστη "john". Πρέπει πρώτα να δημιουργήσετε τον τομέα και τον λογαριασμό χρήστη πριν δημιουργήσετε το ψευδώνυμο ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας.
Τα ψευδώνυμα μπορούν επίσης να προωθηθούν σε άλλα ψευδώνυμα, αν και αυτό περιορίζεται σε ένα περαιτέρω επίπεδο. Για παράδειγμα το ψευδώνυμο "webmaster" μπορεί να προωθηθεί στο ψευδώνυμο "techsupport" το οποίο μετά προωθείται στο συγκεκριμένο χρήστη "ray". Αυτό είναι χρήσιμο στην περίπτωση που ένας χρήστης, υπεύθυνος για πολλούς ρόλους, αποχωρεί από τον οργανισμό περιορίζοντας τις πολλαπλές αλλαγές των ψευδωνύμων που είχαν σχέση με αυτόν τον χρήστη.
Μπορείτε να τροποποιήσετε ή να διαγράψετε ένα ψευδώνυμο πατώντας στην αντίστοιχη εντολή δίπλα στο ψευδώνυμο.
]]>Παρακαλώ σημειώστε ότι μπορεί να χρειαστούν αρκετά λεπτά για τη δημιουργία αυτών των αναφορών
]]>Εάν ο χρήστης ξεπεράσει το "Όριο με περίοδο χάριτος", θα παραχθούν προειδοποιήσεις. Εάν το όριο αυτό ξεπεραστεί για διάστημα μεγαλύτερο της εβδομάδας ή το "Απόλυτο όριο" πληρωθεί, ο χρήστης δεν θα μπορεί στη συνέχεια ν' αποθηκεύει άλλα αρχεία ή να λαμβάνει ηλεκτρονική αλληλογραφία.
Μια ρύθμιση "0" για οποιοδήποτε από τα δύο όρια, καταργεί το συγκεκριμένο όριο του αντίστοιχου χρήστη.
Ο χώρος δίσκων για κάθε χρήστη περιλαμβάνει τον τοπικό κατάλογο του χρήστη, την ηλεκτρονική αλληλογραφία, και οποιαδήποτε αρχεία κυριότητας του χρήστη στα i-bays. ]]>
Ρυθμίσεις Ασφαλούς Κελύφους (Secure Shell)
Μπορείτε να ελέγξετε την πρόσβαση μέσω ασφαλούς κελύφους στο διακομιστή σας. Η ρύθμιση "δημόσια" (public) θα πρέπει να ενεργοποιείται μόνο από πεπειραμένους διαχειριστές με σκοπό την απομεμακρυσμένη διάγνωση και επίλυση προβλημάτων. Συνιστάται να διατηρείται η ρύθμιση "Καμία Πρόσβαση" στην παράμετρο αυτή, εκτός εάν υπάρχει συγκεκριμένος λόγος για το αντίθετο. ]]>Ρυθμίσεις FTP
Μπορείτε επίσης να ελέγξετε την πρόσβαση μέσω FTP στο διακομιστή σας. Συνιστάται να διατηρείται η ρύθμιση "Καμία Πρόσβαση" στην παράμετρο αυτή, εκτός εάν υπάρχει συγκεκριμένος λόγος για το αντίθετο.Σημείωση: αυτές οι ρυθμίσεις περιορίζουν την πρόσβαση προς το διακομιστή σας, υποσκελίζοντας άλλες ρυθμίσεις, περιλαμβανομένων αυτών για εξατομικευμένα πεδία πληροφοριών.
]]>Ρυθμίσεις PPTP
Μπορείτε να επιτρέψετε πρόσβαση PPTP στο διακομιστή σας. Εάν δεν επιθυμείτε PPTP πρόσβαση, θα πρέπει να αφήσετε αυτή τη δυνατότητα απενεργοποιημένη θέτοντας την τιμή 0. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Μπορείτε να επιτρέψετε σε Η/Υ απομεμακρυσμένων δικτύων να προσπελάσουν το διαχειριστή του διακομιστή (server manager), εισάγοντας εδώ τα εν λόγω δίκτυα. Χρησιμοποιήστε τη μάσκα υποδικτύου 255.255.255.255 για να περιορίσετε τη δυνατότητα πρόσβασης από το συγκεκριμένο Η/Υ και μόνον. Οποιοσδήποτε Η/Υ εντός της προσδιορισμένης περιοχής θα έχει πρόσβαση στο διαχειριστή του διακομιστή χρησιμοποιώντας HTTPS.
]]>Σειριακή κονσόλα
Μπορείτε να επιτρέψετε την πρόσβαση στην κονσόλα του διακομιστή από ένα τερματικό συνδεδεμένο σε μία σειριακή θύρα του διακομιστή.]]>Ρυθμίσεις Telnet
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Το Telnet είναι επί του παρόντος ενεργοποιημένο, αλλά δεν υποστηρίζεται πλέον. Το Telnet είναι εγγενώς επισφαλές και πρέπει να χρησιμοποιείται μόνο σε περιστάσεις όπου δεν υφίστανται εναλλακτικές πρακτικές. Πρέπει να αλλάξετε την επιλογή σε {$NO_ACCESS} και να χρησιμοποιήσετε περιβάλλον ασφαλούς κελύφους στην περίπτωση που απαιτείται απομεμακρυσμένη πρόσβαση. Εφόσον απενεργοποιηθεί, το telnet δεν θα εμφανίζεται πλέον στην παρούσα σελίδα. ]]>Μπορείτε ν' αφήσετε ασυμπλήρωτο όποιο πεδίο δεν χρειάζεστε.
Το κείμενο που θα πληκτρολογήσετε στη συνέχεια θα αλλάζει γραμμή (line wrap) για μία ωραιότερη εμφάνιση στην ιστοσελίδας σας. Αφήστε μία κενή γραμμή κάθε φορά που θέλετε να αρχίσετε μία καινούργια παράγραφο. Αν χρειάζεστε αλλαγή γραμμής χωρίς ν' αρχίσετε καινούργια παράγραφο (παραδείγματος χάριν ύστερα από κάθε γραμμή μίας διεύθυνσης αλληλογραφίας), τότε πληκτρολογήστε την τετράδα χαρακτήρων
<BR>εκεί που θα θέλατε κάθε αλλαγή γραμμής.
Μη χρησιμοποιήσετε αυτή τη δυνατότητα εάν έχετε ήδη προσαρμόσει στα μέτρα σας τον ιστότοπό σας διότι θα αντικαταστήσει το περιεχόμενου του αρχείου "index.htm" που βρίσκεται στον κατάλογο του ιστοτόπου σας.
]]>Θέλετε να προχωρήσετε;
]]>Μπορείτε να τροποποιήσετε, κλειδώσετε ή διαγράψετε οποιονδήποτε λογαριασμό, ή να ρυθμίσετε εκ νέου τον κωδικό πρόσβασής του κάνοντας κλικ στην αντίστοιχη εντολή δίπλα στον λογαριασμό.
Αν ο λογαριασμός επισημαίνεται σαν κλειδωμένος αυτό σημαίνει ότι ο κωδικός πρόσβασης του χρήστη πρέπει να αρχικοποιηθεί (reset). Σημειώσατε ότι νεο-δημιουργημένοι λογαριασμοί κλειδώνονται αυτόματα μέχρις ότου αλλαχθεί ο κωδικός πρόσβασής των.
]]>Σημειώσατε ότι σε κάθε νέο λογαριασμό θα δημιουργηθούν δύο εξατομικευμένα ψευδώνυμα. Τα ψευδώνυμα αυτά παρέχουν την δυνατότητα στο χρήστη να έχει δύο εναλλακτικούς λογαριασμούς ηλεκτρονικής αλληλογραφίας οι οποίοι περιλαμβάνουν το όνομα και το επίθετό του χωρισμένα με μία τελεία και μία παύλα υπογράμμισης. Έτσι για τον λογαριασμό "betty" με όνομα "Betty" και επίθετο "Rubble" δημιουργούνται δύο ψευδώνυμα όπως betty.rubble και betty_rubble.
Οι πληροφορίες ευρετηρίου (υπηρεσία, εταιρεία, κ.λ.π.) μπορούν να μεταβληθούν σε σχέση με τις αρχικές που εμφανίζονται κατωτέρω. Οι αλλαγές θα έχουν εφαρμογή μόνο στον συγκεκριμένο χρήστη.
]]>Είστε σίγουροι ότι θέλετε να κλειδώσετε αυτόν το λογαριασμό; ]]>
Είστε σίγουροι ότι επιθυμείτε ν' αφαιρεθεί αυτός ο λογαριασμός; ]]>
Μη-έγκυρος τύπος αναφοράς "{$filename}".
]]>Το παρόν σύστημα είναι ενημερωμένο.
Όλες οι ενημερώσεις έχουν εγκατασταθεί. ]]>Διαθέσιμες ενημερώσεις
Υπάρχουν διαθέσιμες ενημερώσεις για το σύστημά σας. Οι ενημερώσεις αυτές πρέπει να εγκατασταθούν το ταχύτερο δυνατόν. ]]>Αν δεν μπορείτε ν΄αλλάξετε τον κωδικό πρόσβασής σας επειδή έχετε ξεχάσει τον παλαιό, ο τοπικός διαχειριστής συστήματος μπορεί να τον αρχικοποιήσει (reset) χρησιμοποιώντας τον server manager.
]]>El primer método crea una copia de los archivos de datos de usuario y de configuración del servidor y la descarga al escritorio local mediante el explorador Web. El total aproximado actual de los archivos de configuración y de datos es de $tarsize. El archivo de respaldo será un poco menor, dependiendo de lo comprimibles que sean los datos. La opción \"Verificar archivo de respaldo de escritorio\" se puede utilizar para verificar la integridad de un archivo de respaldo de escritorio.
El método de respaldo en cinta utiliza un paquete de software llamado $module para respaldar en cinta el disco duro completo todas las noches. Esto requiere una unidad de cinta compatible y una cinta que no esté protegida contra-escritura. El respaldo se realiza automáticamente todas las noches a la hora seleccionada (enviándose automáticamente al administrador un recordatorio electrónico durante el día). Actualmente, el disco duro contiene $dumpsize de datos.
Los dos métodos de restauración permiten restaurar los archivos de configuración y de datos de usuario. Idealmente, la restauración se debe realizar en un servidor recién instalado.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>El respaldo en cinta requiere una unidad de cinta compatible. Si la unidad de cinta está vacía, se enviará un mensaje de advertencia al administrador a la hora de recordatorio designada.
]]>Antes de continuar, asegúrese de haber cargado la cinta de respaldo deseada en la unidad de cinta.
Luego de que finalice la restauración, debe reiniciar el servidor.
]]>Sólo los archivos marcados con [Guardado] están contenidos en el respaldo.
Los archivos de respaldo son verificados desde la carpeta compartida : ]]>
Antes de continuar, asegúrese de haber elegido debajo el respaldo correcto que desea restaurar.
Luego de que finalice la restauración, debe reiniciar el servidor.
El respaldo será restaurado desde : ]]>El siguiente panel le mostrará los archivos y directorios disponibles, entonces usted podrá elegir los que desee restaurar. Para restringir la cantidad de archivos y directorios mostrados en este panel, tiene la opción de suministrar ahora una expresión de filtrado, aplicada como expresión regular sobre los nombres mostrados.
Usted tiene la responsabilidad de no restaurar los archivos que puedan romper el funcionamiento de su servidor.
Actualmente, los archivos serán restaurados desde : ]]>
Agregar dominio ]]>
¿Está seguro de que desea eliminar este dominio?
]]>Configuración de DNS Corporativa
]]>Delegación de servidores de correo
Su sistema incorpora un servidor de e-mail completamente equipado con todas las funciones. Sin embargo, si por alguna razón desea delegar el procesamiento de e-mail a otro sistema, especifique aquí la dirección IP del servidor delegado. Para una operación normal, deje este campo en blanco. ]]>Configuración de ETRN o multi-drop
Para ETRN o multi-drop, especifique el nombre o dirección IP del servidor de correo secundario. (Si utiliza la configuración de e-mail estándar, este campo se puede dejar en blanco). ]]>Servidor SMTP
El servidor puede entregar los mensajes salientes directamente a su destino (lo cual se recomienda en la mayoría de los casos) o puede entregarlos a través del servidor SMTP de su proveedor de Internet (lo cual se recomienda si tiene una conexión poco confiable a Internet o utiliza un servicio de Internet residencial). Si utiliza el servidor SMTP de su proveedor de Internet, especifique a continuación su nombre de host o dirección IP. De lo contrario, deje este campo en blanco. ]]>Recepción de e-mail
]]>Entrega de e-mail
]]>¿Está seguro de que desea eliminar este nombre de host? ]]>
Puede eliminar cualquier bahía de información o puede restablecer su contraseña haciendo click en el comando correspondiente junto a la bahía de información. Si la bahía de información aparece en rojo, significa que aún no se ha cambiado la contraseña del valor predeterminado y se debe cambiar pronto.
]]>Se borrarán todos los archivos pertenecientes a esta bahía de información.
¿Está seguro de que desea eliminar esta bahía de información?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server esta disponible de forma gratuita bajo la Licencia Pública General GNU y sólo es posible gracias a los esfuerzos de la comunidad SME Server. Sin embargo, la disponibilidad y calidad del SME Server es dependiente de la resolución de nuestros costos, tales como costos de alojamiento, hardware de los servidores, etc.
Debido a ello, pedimos una pequeña donación para ayudarnos a solventar los costos y fomentar el desarrollo.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para realizar la donación.
Este software no provee NINGUN TIPO DE GARANTIA. Haga click aquí para ver un detallado informe de soporte, garantía y concesión de licencias.
Para realizar tareas administrativas, haga click en uno de los enlaces del menú de la izquierda de su pantalla.
]]>Click aquí para obtener un listado de las funciones de administración del sistema.
]]>Agregar red ]]>
"Router" debe corresponder a la dirección IP del router de su red local a través del cual se alcanza la red adicional. ]]>
Su servidor concederá privilegios de acceso local a {$totalHosts} direcciones IP en el rango de {$firstAddr} a {$lastAddr}.
Advertencia: el servidor FTP ProFTPd no puede manejar esta máscara de subred no estándar. En su lugar, se utilizará la especificación más simple {$simpleMask}.
]]>Soporte y concesión de licencias
Este software es liberado bajo los términos enunciados en la página de Soporte y Concesión de licencias. ]]>ADVERTENCIA: El mal uso de esta función puede comprometer seriamente la seguridad de su red. No utilice esta función ligeramente o sin entender totalmente las consecuencias de sus acciones.
]]>El nombre de la impresora sólo debe contener números y letras minúsculas, y debe comenzar con una minúscula. Por ejemplo "hplaser", "epsonlp", y "canonbj" son nombres válidos.
]]>Los seudónimos le permiten crear otros nombres para usuarios o grupos existentes. Por ejemplo, usted desea crear un seudónimo "webmaster" para el grupo "webdevelopers" o un seudónimo "beto" para el usuario "alberto".
El servidor crea automáticamente seudónimos en la forma nombre.apellido y nombre_apellido para cada usuario en el sistema y un seudónimo "everyone" que contiene a todos los usuarios del sistema.
Los seudónimos también le permitirán crear un alias de e-mail para los dominios (virtuales) y usuarios. Por ejemplo puede redirigir "ventas@dominiovirtual1.com" al usuario "maria" y "ventas@dominiovirtual2.com" al usuario "juan". Usted debe crear los dominios y cuentas de usuarios antes de crear los alias de e-mail.
Los seudónimos también pueden ser redirigidos a otros seudónimos, aunque esto es limitado a un solo nivel más. Por ejemplo el seudónimo "webmaster" puede redirigirse al seudónimo "techsupport" el cual luego es redirigido a un usuario específico "pablo". Esto es de suma utilidad cuando un usuario es responsable de múltiples roles y ahorra de tener que cambiar el seudónimo asociado con ese usuario muchas veces en el caso de que el usuario no pertenezca mas a la organización.
Usted puede modificar o eliminar un seudónimo al hacer click sobre el correspondiente comando seguido al seudónimo.
]]>Observe que puede demorar varios minutos en generar esos informes
]]>Si el usuario excede el "Límite con período de gracia", se generarán advertencias. Si se excede este límite por más de una semana o si se alcanza el "Límite absoluto", el usuario no podrá almacenar más archivos ni recibir más correos electrónicos.
Si ambos límites se configuran en '0', se deshabilitarán esos límites para el usuario correspondiente.
El espacio en el disco para cada usuario incluye el directorio principal, el correo electrónico y cualquier archivo que posea el usuario en las bahías de información. ]]>
Configuración de shell seguro
Puede controlar el acceso de shell seguro al servidor. La configuración pública la deben habilitar sólo los administradores experimentados para diagnosticar y solucionar problemas remotos. Se recomienda que este parámetro se deje configurado en "Sin acceso" a menos que tenga una razón específica para hacer lo contrario. ]]>Configuración de FTP
También puede controlar el acceso FTP al servidor. Se recomienda que este parámetro se deje configurado en 'sin acceso' a menos que tenga una razón específica para hacer lo contrario.Nota: esta configuración limita el acceso al servidor y anula otros ajustes, incluidos los correspondientes a bahías de información individuales.
]]>Configuración PPTP
Usted puede permitir acceso PPTP al servidor. Debería dejar esta función deshabilitada configurando el valor en 0, a menos que necesite acceso PPTP. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Se puede permitir el acceso a hosts de redes remotas a la administración del servidor si introduce esas redes aquí. Use una máscara de subred de 255.255.255.255 para limitar el acceso al host especificado. Todos los hosts dentro del rango especificado podrán acceder al administrador del servidor utilizando HTTPS.
]]>Consola serie
Puede permitir acceso a la consola del servidor desde un terminal conectado a un puerto serie del servidor.]]>Configuración de Telnet
ADVERTENCIA: Actualmente Telnet se encuentra habilitado, pero esta característica ya no es soportada. Telnet es inherentemente inseguro y debe ser usado únicamente en aquellas circunstancias donde ninguna otra alternativa se encuentra disponible. Usted debe cambiar la opción a {$NO_ACCESS} y usar shell seguro si el acceso remoto es requerido. Una vez que Telnet sea deshabilitado, esta opción no volverá a aparecer en esta pantalla. ]]>Puede dejar cualquier campo en blanco si no lo necesita.
El texto que escriba a continuación estará rodeado por líneas para que tenga una apariencia más agradable en su página Web. Deje una línea en blanco cada vez que desee comenzar un párrafo nuevo. Si necesita introducir un corte de línea sin comenzar un nuevo párrafo (por ejemplo, después de cada línea de una dirección de correo), escriba la secuencia de cuatro caracteres
<BR>donde desee añadir un salto de línea.
No use esta opción si ya ha personalizado su sitio Web, debido a que se sobrescribirá el archivo "index.htm" en el directorio de su sitio Web.
]]>¿Desea continuar?
]]>Puede modificar, bloquear o eliminar cualquier cuenta o restablecer la contraseña de la cuenta al hacer click en el comando correspondiente junto a ella.
Si la cuenta está marcada como bloqueada, eso significa que se debe restablecer la contraseña del usuario. Observe que las cuentas creadas recientemente se bloquean automáticamente hasta que se cambia la contraseña.
]]>Observe que se crearán dos seudónimos especiales para cada cuenta nueva. Estos seudónimos brindan la capacidad de tener cuentas de correo alternativas para el usuario, que incluyen su nombre y apellido separados por un punto (.) o un guión bajo (_). Por lo tanto, para la cuenta "beatriz" con el nombre "Beatriz" y el apellido "Rojas", se crean dos seudónimos: beatriz.rojas y beatriz_rojas.
La información de directorio (departamento, compañía, etc.) se puede cambiar de las opciones predeterminadas que se muestran a continuación. Los cambios se aplicarán sólo a este usuario.
]]>¿Está seguro de que desea bloquear esta cuenta? ]]>
¿Está seguro de que desea eliminar esta cuenta? ]]>
Tipo de informe inválido "{$filename}".
]]>El sistema está actualizado.
Todas las actualizaciones fueron instaladas. ]]>Actualizaciones Disponibles
Hay actualizaciones disponibles para su sistema. Estas actualizaciones deben instalarse lo antes posible. ]]>Si no puede cambiar la contraseña porque olvidó la antigua, el administrador del sistema local puede restablecer su contraseña mediante el administrador de servidor.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Viimane fail varundusfailis peap olema "smbpasswd".
]]>The tape backup requires a supported tape drive. A warning message will be sent to the administrator at the designated reminder time if the tape drive is empty.
]]>Ensure that you have loaded the desired backup tape into the tape drive before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
]]>Only files flagged with [Saved] are contained in the backup.
Backup files are verified from shared folder : ]]>
Ensure that choose the right backup to restore below before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
Backup will be restored from : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this domain?
]]>Asutuse DNS seaded
]]>Delegeeri e-posti server
Sinu server sisaldab täis e-posti serverit. Kui mingil põhjusel soovid e-posti teenust delegrreida mõnele teisel süsteemile, siis sisesta selle süsteemi IP aadress siia. Vaikimis jäta see väli tühjaks. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
For ETRN or multi-drop, specify the hostname or IP address of your secondary mail server. (If using the standard e-mail setup, this field can be left blank.) ]]>SMTP server
The server can deliver outgoing messages directly to their destination (recommended in most cases) or can deliver them via your Internet provider's SMTP server (recommended if you have an unreliable Internet connection or are using a residential Internet service). If using your Internet provider's SMTP server, specify its hostname or IP address below. Otherwise leave this field blank. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>E-posti tagastus
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
You can remove any information bay or reset its password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the information bay. If the information bay shows up in red, that means that the password has not yet been changed from the default, and should be changed soon.
]]>All files belonging to this information bay will be deleted.
Are you sure you wish to remove this information bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a small donation to offset costs and fund further development.
Palun külasta http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ toetamaks serveri arendust.
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>Vajuta siia for a list of system administration functions.
]]>Lisa võrk ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>Kasutajatugi ja litsents
See tarkvara kasutus põhineb õigustel mis on kättesaadvad Kasutajatugi ja litsentsi lehel page. ]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>Printeri nimi võib sisaldada ainult väiketähti ja numbreid. Näiteks "hplaser" aga "HP Laser" ei sobi.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>Pane tähele, et raporti koostamine võib võtta mitu minutit
]]>Kui kasutaja ületab hoiatuslimiidi, siis saab ta hoiatuskirja. Kui see limiit on ületatud kauem kui nädal või on ületatud absoluutne limiit, siis kasutaja ei saa süsteemi salvestada faile ega vastuvõtta e-posti.
Kui limiidiks on '0' siis see tähendab et limiit puudub
Kasutaja limiiti arvestatakse kasutajate kodukataloog, e-kirjad ja kõik failid mis kuuluvad antud kasutajale i-bay-des. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>PPTP Seaded
Saad lubada PPTP juurdepääsu oma serverile. Juurdepääsu keelamiseks anna väärtuseks 0 kui sul pole PPTP juurdepääsu vaja. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Võimalik on lubada teatud hostidest serveri kaughaldust, selleks sisesta need võrgud siia. Kasuta subnet maski 255.255.255.255 et limiteerida juurdepääsu teatud hostidest. Kõik hostid mis mahuvad vahemiku saavad juurdepääsu serveri kaughaldusele üle HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
You can allow access to the server console from a terminal connected to a server serial port.]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>Võib ka väljad tühjaks jätta kui sa ei vaja neid.
The text that you enter below will be line wrapped for a nicer appearance in your web page. Leave a blank line whenever you want to start a new paragraph. If you need to force a line break without starting a new paragraph (for example after each line of a mailing address), then type the four-character sequence
<BR>where you would like each line break.
Pea meeles et, kui sa oled juba varem omale loonud veebilehe, siis nüüd kirjutatakse üle juba olemasolev "index.htm" fail.
]]>Oled kindel , et jätkad?
]]>Kasutajakontosid saad muuta, lukustada ja kustutada kui klikid kasutajakonto taga olevaid linke.
Kui konto tga on kirjas et "Konto on lukus" siis avamiseks tuleb talle uus parool luua. Pane tähele, et uue kasutajakonto loomisel on ta automaatselt lukus, kuni talle parool luuakse.
]]>Note that two special pseudonyms will be created for each new account. These pseudonyms provide the ability to have alternative mail accounts for that user which include their first name and last name separated with a period (.) and underscore (_). So, for the account "betty" with first name "Betty" and last name "Rubble" two pseudonyms are created as betty.rubble and betty_rubble.
The directory information (department, company, etc.) can be changed from the defaults shown below. The changes will apply only to this user.
]]>Oled kindel et tahad siiski selle konto lukustada? ]]>
Oled kindel, et tahad seda kasutajakontot kustutada? ]]>
Invalid report type "{$filename}".
]]>Süsteem on uuendatud.
Kõik saada olevad uuendused on installitud. ]]>Saadaval on uuendused
Saadval on uuendused sinu süsteemi jaoks. Need uuendused tuleks installida nii ruttu kui võimalik. ]]>Kui sa ei saa oma parooli muuta kuna oled vana parooli unustanud, siis võta ühendust oma kohaliku administraatoriga kes saab su parooli tühistada.
]]>La première méthode crée une archive des fichiers de configuration du serveur et des données des utilisateurs et la télécharge sur un ordinateur de votre réseau local à l'aide d'un navigateur Internet. Actuellement, vos fichiers de configuration et de données totalisent environ $tarsize. La taille du fichier de sauvegarde sera quelque peu inférieure à cela, en fonction du degré de compressibilité des données. L'option \"Vérifier le fichier de sauvegarde de l'ordinateur\" peut être utilisée pour vérifier l'intégrité d'un fichier de sauvegarde stocké sur l'ordinateur local.
La méthode de sauvegarde sur bande utilise le programme $module pour sauvegarder quotidiennement tout votre disque dur. Ceci nécessite que le lecteur/enregistreur de bande magnétique soit pris en charge et que la bande ne soit pas protégée contre l'écriture. La sauvegarde est exécutée automatiquement chaque jour à l'heure sélectionnée, (avec un rappel envoyé à l'administrateur dans la journée par courriel.
Actuellement, votre disque dur contient $dumpsize de données.
Les deux méthodes de restauration vous permettent de restaurer vos fichiers de configuration et les données des utilisateurs.
Idéalement, la restauration ne devrait se faire que sur un serveur nouvellement installé.
La première méthode crée une copie de la configuration du serveur et des données utilisateur puis les transfère sur votre ordinateur local, via votre navigateur Internet. Actuellement, la taille totale de ces données représente approximativement $tarsize. La taille du fichier de sauvegarde sera légèrement inférieure à ceci, en fonction de la compressibilité de ces données. Ce fichier peut être utilisé pour restaurer votre serveur depuis la console si vous le copiez sur un média de stockage tel qu'un disque amovible.
La méthode de sauvegarde sur bande exploite le programme $module pour sauvegarder quotidiennement l'intégralité du disque dur du serveur. Ceci nécessite l'emploi d'un lecteur/enregistreur de bandes reconnu et d'une bande non protégée en écriture. La sauvegarde est effectuée automatiquement à l'heure sélectionnée (un courriel de rappel est aussi envoyé automatiquement à l'administrateur). Actuellement, la taille totale utilisée sur le disque dur de votre serveur représente approximativement $dumpsize.
La méthode de sauvegarde sur un ordinateur distant exploite le programme dar pour sauvegarder la configuration de votre serveur et les données utilisateur vers un ordinateur sur votre réseau local (ou un disque USB connecté au serveur). Ceci nécessite que vous disposiez d'un partage accessible en écriture (smbfs, cifs, ou nfs) sur l'ordinateur distant ou d'un disque USB sur le serveur. Vous pouvez définir le nombre de jeux de sauvegardes devant être conservés sur le partage, ainsi que la possibilité de créer des jeux de sauvegardes incrémentales sur plusieurs jours. La sauvegarde est effectuée automatiquement à l'heure sélectionnée. Actuellement, les fichiers de configuration et de données représentent approximativement $tarsize non compressés. Le partage de sauvegarde doit offrir deux fois la taille d'une sauvegarde non compressée.
Toutes les méthodes de restauration vous permettent de restaurer la configuration du serveur et des données utilisateur. La sauvegarde sur un ordinateur distant permet de restaurer chaque fichier individuellement. Idéalement, une restauration complète devrait être effectuée sur un serveur nouvellement installé.
]]>La sauvegarde sur bande nécessite que le lecteur/enregistreur de bande soit pris en charge. Un courriel d'avertissement sera envoyé à l'administrateur à l'heure indiquée pour le rappel si le lecteur de bande est vide.
]]>Cette restauration ne devrait être effectuée que sur un serveur nouvellement installé.
Assurez-vous de charger la bande de sauvegarde désirée dans le lecteur/enregistreur avant de poursuivre.
Après la fin de la restauration, vous devrez redémarrer le serveur.
]]>Seuls les fichiers portant la mention [Saved] sont effectivement inclus dans la sauvegarde sélectionnée.
Les fichiers de sauvegarde sont vérifiés à partir du dossier partagé : ]]>Cette restauration ne devrait être effectuée que sur un serveur nouvellement installé.
Assurez-vous de sélectionner le bon fichier de sauvegarde avant de poursuivre.
Après la fin de la restauration, vous devrez redémarrer le serveur.
La restauration va être effectuée à partir de : ]]>L'écran suivant affichera les fichiers et répertoires disponibles, et vous pourrez choisir ceux à restaurer. Pour réduire le nombre de fichiers et de répertoires affichés, il vous est possible de fournir une expression de filtrage, utilisée comme une expression régulière qui sera appliquée aux noms affichés.
Vous devez veiller à ne pas restaurer de fichiers empêchant le fonctionnement de votre serveur.
Actuellement, les fichiers vont être restaurés à partir de : ]]>
Voulez-vous vraiment supprimer ce domaine ?
]]>Paramètres DNS de votre organisation
]]>Serveurs de messagerie électronique délégués
Votre serveur inclut un serveur de messagerie électronique complet et doté de toutes les fonctionnalités. Cependant, si, pour une raison quelconque, vous souhaitez déléguer le traitement des courriels à un autre système, veuillez indiquer ici le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du système délégué. Pour un fonctionnement normal, vous pouvez laisser ce champ vide. ]]>Paramètres ETRN ou multipoint
Pour les modes de récupération ETRN ou multipoint, veuillez taper ci-dessous le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP de votre serveur de messagerie électronique secondaire. Si vous utilisez une configuration standard pour votre messagerie, vous pouvez laisser ce champ vide. ]]>Serveur SMTP
Le serveur peut envoyer les courriels sortants directement à leur destinataire (recommandé dans la plupart des cas) ou bien les transmettre en passant par le serveur SMTP de votre fournisseur d'accès (recommandé si votre connexion Internet n'est pas fiable ou si votre accès Internet est filtré). Si vous souhaitez exploiter le serveur SMTP de votre fournisseur d'accès, veuillez taper son nom d'hôte ou son adresse IP ci-dessous. Sinon, laissez ce champ vide. ]]>Réception des courriels
]]>Envoi des courriels
]]>Voulez-vous vraiment supprimer ce nom d'hôte ?
]]>Vous pouvez supprimer n'importe quelle i-bay ou réinitialiser son mot de passe en cliquant sur le lien correspondant à côté du nom de l'i-bay. Si l'i-bay apparaît en rouge, cela signifie que son mot de passe n'a pas été défini et qu'il faudrait le faire rapidement.
]]>Tous les fichiers contenus dans cette i-bay seront supprimés.
Voulez-vous vraiment supprimer cette i-bay ?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server est gratuitement exploitable, selon les termes de la Licence "GNU General Public License", et n'existe que grâce aux efforts de la communauté formée autour de SME Server. Toutefois, la disponibilité et la qualité de SME Server dépendent de notre capacité à régler nos dépenses telles que les coûts liés à l'hébergement, au serveur matériel, etc.
De ce fait, nous demandons une petite contribution financière afin de couvrir nos dépenses et d'assurer les développements à venir.
Veuillez aller sur http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ pour effectuer votre donation.
Ce système d'exploitation ne dispose d'AUCUNE GARANTIE. Veuillez cliquer ici pour afficher les informations détaillées concernant le support technique, la garantie et la licence d'exploitation.
Pour effectuer une tâche d'administration du système, cliquez sur l'un des liens dans le menu situé à la gauche de votre écran.
]]>Veuillez cliquer ici pour obtenir la liste des tâches d'administration du système.
]]>Le champ 'Routeur' doit contenir l'adresse IP du routeur local assurant la liaison vers le réseau supplémentaire.
]]>Votre serveur accordera des privilèges d'accès local aux {$totalHosts} adresses IP comprises dans l'intervalle {$firstAddr} à {$lastAddr}.
ATTENTION : le serveur FTP ProFTPd ne peut pas traiter ce masque de sous-réseau non standard. Le masque simplifié {$simpleMask} sera utilisé à la place.
]]>Support technique et license d'exploitation
Ce système d'exploitation est soumis aux règles décrites dans la page consacrée au support technique et à la license d'exploitation. ]]>ATTENTION : une mauvaise utilisation de cette fonctionnalité peut compromettre gravement la sécurité de votre réseau. N'utilisez pas cette fonction à la légère ou sans être pleinement conscient des conséquences de votre acte.
]]>Le nom de l'imprimante doit commencer par une lettre minuscule et ne contenir que des lettres minuscules et des chiffres. Par exemple, "hplaser", "epsonlp" et "canonbj" sont des noms valides.
]]>Les pseudonymes vous permettent de créer d'autres noms pour des utilisateurs ou des groupes existants. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer le pseudonyme "webmestre" pour le groupe "concepteurs Web" ou le pseudonyme "joe" pour l'utilisateur "joseph".
Le serveur crée automatiquement des pseudonymes de la forme prénom.nom et prénom_nom pour chaque utilisateur du système et le pseudonyme "everyone", qui contient tous les utilisateurs du système.
Les pseudonymes vous permettent également de créer des alias de courriel pour des domaines (virtuels) et des utilisateurs existants. Vous pouvez, par exemple, associer "ventes@virtualdomain1.com" à l'utilisateur "marie" et "ventes@virtualdomain2.com" à l'utilisateur "jean". Vous devrez créer les domaines et les comptes utilisateurs avant la création de ces alias de messagerie.
Un pseudonyme peut également pointer vers un autre pseudonyme, dans la limite d'un niveau d'association. Par exemple, le pseudonyme "webmestre" peut pointer vers le pseudonyme "support_tech" qui renvoie lui-même vers l'utilisateur "raymond". Ceci est très pratique dans le cas où une personne, responsable de plusieurs fonctions, venait à quitter votre organisation : cela permettrait d'éviter de changer l'association de tous les pseudonymes qui auraient été associés directement à cet utilisateur.
Vous pouvez modifier ou supprimer un pseudonyme en cliquant sur la commande correspondante à côté du pseudonyme.
]]>Veuillez noter que la génération de ces rapports peut prendre plusieurs minutes.
]]>Si l'utilisateur dépasse la "limite avec période de grâce", des avertissements lui seront envoyés. Si cette limite est dépassée pendant plus d'une semaine ou si la "limite absolue" est atteinte, l'utilisateur ne pourra plus stocker d'autres fichiers ni recevoir d'autres courriels.
La valeur "0" pour l'une ou l'autre des limites désactive cette limite pour l'utilisateur correspondant.
L'espace disque utilisé par l'utilisateur comprend son répertoire personnel, ses courriels, ainsi que tous les fichiers dont il est propriétaire dans les différentes i-bays.
]]>Paramètres SSH
Vous pouvez contrôler l'accès à votre serveur par terminal sécurisé (SSH). L'accès "public" ne doit être activé que par des administrateurs expérimentés afin de pouvoir diagnostiquer et résoudre des problèmes à distance. Nous vous recommandons de laisser ce paramètre validé sur "Aucun accès", à moins que vous n'ayez une raison bien précise de faire autrement.
]]>Paramètres FTP
Vous pouvez aussi contrôler l'accès par FTP à votre serveur. Nous vous recommandons de laisser ce paramètre validé sur "aucun accès", à moins que vous n'ayez une raison bien précise de faire autrement.
Remarque : ces paramètres limitent l'accès global au serveur FTP et priment sur tout autre, y compris ceux définis pour chaque i-bay.
]]>Remarque : il est également possible d'utiliser un client SFTP (terminal sécurisé) pour accéder au serveur, à condition que l'accès à distance par SSH ait été activé. Ce mode d'accès protège les mots de passe et les données de la session FTP, tandis que le FTP standard n'offre aucune protection à cet égard.
]]>Paramètres PPTP
Vous pouvez autoriser l'accès VPN par PPTP à votre serveur. Nous vous recommandons de laisser cette fonctionnalité désactivée en fixant la valeur à 0, à moins que vous n'ayez absolument besoin d'un accès par PPTP.
]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Il est possible de permettre l'accès au gestionnaire du serveur à des hôtes situés sur des réseaux distants en indiquant ces réseaux ici. Utilisez le masque de sous-réseau 255.255.255.255 pour ne permettre l'accès qu'à une machine unique. Tout hôte contenu dans la plage d'adresses spécifiée pourra alors accéder au gestionnaire du serveur à l'aide du protocole sécurisé HTTPS.
]]>Console sur port série
Vous pouvez autoriser l'accès à la console du serveur à partir d'un terminal relié à un port série du serveur. ]]>Paramètres Telnet
AVERTISSEMENT : Telnet est actuellement activé, mais cette fonctionnalité n'est plus prise en charge. Intrinsèquement, Telnet n'est pas sécurisé et nous vous recommandons de ne pas l'utiliser, à moins que vous n'ayez pas d'autre alternative. Vous devriez définir cette option à "{$NO_ACCESS}" et utiliser un terminal sécurisé (SSH) si l'accès distant est nécessaire. Une fois désactivé, Telnet n'apparaîtra plus sur cette page. ]]>Vous pouvez laisser n'importe lequel de ces champs vide si vous n'en avez pas l'utilité.
Le texte que vous taperez ci-dessous s'affichera avec des retours à la ligne automatiques pour que la page Web soit conforme à ce que vous tapez. Laissez une ligne vide chaque fois que vous voulez commencer un nouveau paragraphe. Si vous avez besoin d'imposer un retour à la ligne sans commencer un nouveau paragraphe (par exemple, après chaque ligne d'une adresse), alors tapez la séquence de quatre caractères :
<BR>où vous souhaitez avoir le saut de ligne.
N'utilisez pas cette fonctionnalité si vous avez déjà personnalisé votre site Web, car elle écrasera le contenu du fichier "index.htm" de votre site primaire.
]]>Voulez-vous continuer ?
]]>Vous pouvez modifier, verrouiller ou supprimer n'importe quel compte ou bien réinitialiser le mot de passe d'un compte en cliquant sur la commande correspondante à côté du compte.
Si le compte est marqué comme étant verrouillé, cela signifie qu'il faut réinitialiser le mot de passe de l'utilisateur. Veuillez noter que les comptes nouvellement créés sont automatiquement verrouillés jusqu'à ce qu'un mot de passe ait été saisi.
]]>Notez que deux pseudonymes spéciaux seront créés pour chaque nouveau compte. Ces pseudonymes donnent à l'utilisateur la possibilité d'avoir des comptes de messagerie supplémentaires composés de son prénom et de son nom, séparés par un point (.) et par un trait de soulignement (_). Ainsi, pour le compte "betty", avec "Betty" comme prénom et "Rubble" comme nom, deux pseudonymes sont créés, à savoir "betty.rubble" et "betty_rubble".
Les valeurs par défaut de l'annuaire (service, société, etc.) peuvent être modifiées à votre convenance. Ces modifications ne s'appliqueront qu'à cet utilisateur.
]]>Voulez-vous vraiment verrouiller ce compte ?
]]>Voulez-vous vraiment supprimer ce compte ?
]]>Type de rapport non valide pour "{$filename}".
]]>Le système est à jour.
Toutes les mises à jour ont été installées ]]>Mises à jour disponibles
Il y a des mises à jour disponibles pour votre système. Ces mises à jour devraient être installées dès que possible. ]]>Si vous ne pouvez pas modifier votre mot de passe parce que vous avez oublié l'ancien, l'administrateur de votre serveur peut le réinitialiser à l'aide du gestionnaire du serveur.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>אנא ודא כי קלטת הגיבוי הוכנסה אל טייפ הגיבוי לפני שתמשיך.
אחרי השלמת השחזור עליך לאתחל את השרת. ]]>רק קבצים בעלי דגל [Saved] מאוכסנים בגיבוי.
קבצי גיבוי נבדקים מתוך תיקיית השיתוף: ]]>
Ensure that choose the right backup to restore below before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
Backup will be restored from : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this domain?
]]>Corporate DNS Settings
]]>Delegate mail servers
Your server includes a complete, full-featured e-mail server. However, if for some reason you wish to delegate e-mail processing to another system, specify the IP address of the delegate system here. For normal operation, leave this field blank. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
For ETRN or multi-drop, specify the hostname or IP address of your secondary mail server. (If using the standard e-mail setup, this field can be left blank.) ]]>SMTP server
The server can deliver outgoing messages directly to their destination (recommended in most cases) or can deliver them via your Internet provider's SMTP server (recommended if you have an unreliable Internet connection or are using a residential Internet service). If using your Internet provider's SMTP server, specify its hostname or IP address below. Otherwise leave this field blank. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>E-mail delivery
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
ניתן להסיר כל i-bay או לאפס את סיסמתו על ידי לחיצה על הפקודה המתאימה ליד הi-bay. אם הi-bay מוצג באדום, זה מכיוון שהסיסמה עדיין לא שונתה מברירת המחדל ועליך לשנותה בקרוב.
]]>כל הקבצים השייכים למרץ מידע זה ימחקו.
האם אתה בטוח שברצונך להסיר מפרץ מידע זה?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>Click here for a list of system administration functions.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>תמיכה ורישוי
תוכנה זו משוחררת תחת התנאים המפורטים בדף תמיכה ורישוי]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>The printer name should contain only lower-case letters and numbers, and should start with a lower-case letter. For example "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" are valid names.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>שים לב שזה עלול לקחת כמה דקות כדי להפיק את הדוחות הללו
]]>If the user exceeds the "Limit with grace period", warnings will be generated. If this limit is exceeded for longer than a week or if the "Absolute limit" is reached, the user will be unable to store any more files or receive any more e-mail.
A setting of '0' for either limit disables that limit for the corresponding user.
The disk space for each user includes the user's home directory, e-mail, and any files owned by the user in information bays. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>PPTP Settings
You can allow PPTP access to your server. You should leave this feature disabled by setting the value to the number 0 unless you require PPTP access. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
It is possible to allow hosts on remote networks to access the server manager by entering those networks here. Use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 to limit the access to the specified host. Any hosts within the specified range will be able to access the server manager using HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
You can allow access to the server console from a terminal connected to a server serial port.]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>You can leave any field blank if you do not need it.
The text that you enter below will be line wrapped for a nicer appearance in your web page. Leave a blank line whenever you want to start a new paragraph. If you need to force a line break without starting a new paragraph (for example after each line of a mailing address), then type the four-character sequence
<BR>where you would like each line break.
Do not use this option if you have already customized your web site, since it will overwrite the "index.htm" file in your web site directory.
]]>Do you wish to proceed?
]]>You can modify, lock or remove any account or reset the account's password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the account.
If the account is marked as locked, that means that the user's password needs to be reset. Please note that newly created accounts are automatically locked until the password is changed.
]]>Note that two special pseudonyms will be created for each new account. These pseudonyms provide the ability to have alternative mail accounts for that user which include their first name and last name separated with a period (.) and underscore (_). So, for the account "betty" with first name "Betty" and last name "Rubble" two pseudonyms are created as betty.rubble and betty_rubble.
The directory information (department, company, etc.) can be changed from the defaults shown below. The changes will apply only to this user.
]]>Are you sure you wish to lock this account? ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this account? ]]>
Invalid report type "{$filename}".
]]>This system is up to date.
All updates have been installed. ]]>Updates Available
There are updates available for your system. These updates should be installed as soon as possible. ]]>במידה ואינך יכול לשנות את הסיסמא כי שכחת את סיסמתך הישנה יוכל מנהל הרשת המקומי שלך לאפס אותה באמצעות מנהל השרת.
]]>Az első módszerrel a szerver másolatot készít a konfigurációs fájlokról és a felhasználói adatokról, majd letölti azt a helyi munkaasztalra a webböngészőn keresztül. Jelenleg az ön konfigurációs és felhasználói adatainak mérete $tarsize. Az elkészült biztonsági mentés valamivel kisebb lesz ennél, attól függően, hogy az adatok mennyire tömöríthetők. Az \"Asztali mentés ellenőrzése\" opcióval ellenőrizheti az asztali mentés fájl integritását.
A szalagos mentés egy $module-nevű szoftvercsomagot használ, amellyel minden éjjel lementi szalagra a merevlemez teljes tartalmát. Ehhez támogatott szalagos meghajtó és nem írásvédett szalagok kellenek. A biztonsági mentés minden éjjel automatikusan történik (A rendszergazda automatikus figyelmeztető email-t kap előtte a nap folyamán). Jelenleg a merevlemez $dumpsize adatot tartalmaz.
Mindkét biztonsági mentés lehetővé teszi, hogy a konfigurációs fájlokat és felhasználói adatokat helyreállítsa.Teljes rendszer-helyreállítást frissen telepített rendszeren érdemes végrehajtani..
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>A szalagos mentéshez támogatott szalagos meghajtó kell. A rendszer egy figyelmeztető üzenetet küld a rendszergazdának a megadott időpontban, ha a szalagos meghajtóban nincs szalag.
]]>Mielőtt nekikezdene, bizonyosodjon meg afelől, hogy a megfelelő kazetta van betöltve a szalagos meghajtóba.
A rendszer helyreállítása után újra kell indítania a szervert.
]]>Csak a [Saved] címkével jelölt fájlokat tartalmazza a mentés.
A biztonsági mentések a következő megosztáson lesznek ellenőrizve : ]]>
A továbblépés előtt bizonyosodjon meg, hogy a megfelelő biztonsági mentést választotta ki.
A rendszer-helyreállítás befejezése után újra kell indítani a szervert.
A helyreállítandó biztonsági mentés helye : ]]>A következő oldalon kilistázódnak az elérhető fájlok és könyvtárak, amelyekből kiválaszthatja az önnek megfelelőket. A megjelenítendő fájlok és könyvtárak számának csökkentéséhez szűrést is alkalmazhat.
Az ön felelőssége az, hogy ne állítson helyre olyan fájlokat amelyek tönkretehetik a szerver működését.
Jelenleg a fájlok a következő helyről lesznek helyreállítva : ]]>
Domén hozzáadása ]]>
Biztos benne, hogy törölni akarja?
]]>Vállalati DNS beállítások
]]>Levelezőszerver delegálása
A szervere egy teljes funkcionalitású e-mail szervert tartalmaz. Azonban, ha valamilyen okból másik rendszerre akarja bízni az e-mail-ek feldolgozását, adja meg a delegált rendszer IP címét. Normál esetben hagyja ezt a mezőt üresen. ]]>ETRN vagy multi-drop beállítás
ETRN vagy multi-drop használata esetén adja meg a másodlagos levelezőszerver nevét, vagy IP címét. (Szabványos e-mail beállítás esetén hagyja üresen ezt a mezőt.) ]]>SMTP szerver
A szerver saját maga is továbbítani tudja a leveleket a címzetteknek (ez a beállítás ajánlott a legtöbb esetben) vagy pedig az internet szolgáltatója SMTP szerverén keresztül történhet a továbbítás (ez akkor ajánlott, ha megbízhatatlan, vagy betárcsázós Internet kapcsolata van). Ha a szolgáltatója SMTP szerverét kívánja használni, az alábbi mezőben adja meg annak nevét, vagy IP címét. Más esetben hagyja azt üresen. ]]>E-mail fogadás
]]>E-mail kézbesítés
]]>Biztos benne, hogy eltávolítja ezt a kiszolgálónevet? ]]>
Eltávolíthatja bármelyik adattárat, vagy megváltoztathatja azok jelszavát. Ha az adattár neve piros színű, az azt jelenti, hogy az adattár alapértelmezett jelszava még nem lett megváltoztatva és hamarosan el kell végezni az új jelszó beállítását.
]]>Minden fájl, amit az adattár tartalmaz, megsemmisül.
Biztos benne, hogy törli az adattárat?
]]>- {$vhostList}
Az SME Server szabadon elérhető a GNU General Public License alatt és az SME Server közösség önerejéből jött létre. Azonban az SME Server hozzáférhetősége és minősége nagyban függ a költségeinktől, mint például tárhely költségek, szerver hardver, stb.
Ezért kiadásaink ellensúlyozására és a további fejlesztések támogatására szívesen fogadjuk pénzbeli támogatását.
Kérjük látogassa meg http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ weboldalt adománya elküldéséhez.
Ez a szoftver SEMMILYEN GARANCIÁT NEM TARTALMAZ. Kérjük kattintson ide a részletes terméktámogatási, garancia és licensz információkért.
A rendszer adminisztrálásához kattintson a képernyő bal oldalán lévő oszlop valamely menüpontjára.
]]>Kattintson ide a rendszer adminisztrációs funkciók listájának megtekintéséhez.
]]>Az "Átjáró" annak az eszköznek az IP címe amelyen keresztül elérhetők a további külső hálózatok ]]>
Figyelem: a ProFTPd FTP szerver nem tudja kezelni az ilyen fajta alhálózati maszkot. Az egyszerűbb {$simpleMask} lesz helyette használatban.
]]>Terméktámogatás és licenszelés
Ezen szoftver terjesztési feltételei a Terméktámogatás és licenszelés oldalon olvashatók. ]]>Figyelem: Ennek a szolgáltatásnak a helytelen használatával komolyan veszélyeztetheti a belső hálózat biztonságát. Ne használja ezt a szolgáltatást felelőtlenül, vagy anélkül, hogy teljes mértékben tisztában lenne a tettei következményeivel.
]]>A nyomtató neve csak kisbetűket és számokat tartalmazhat, és betűvel kell kezdődnie. Például a "hplaser", "epsonlp", és "canonbj" érvényes nevek.
]]>A fedőnevek lehetővé teszik hogy más nevet hozzon létre a már létező felhasználók vagy csoportok számára. Például ha szeretne egy "webmaster" fedőnevet létrehozni a "webdevelopers" csoportja számára, vagy egy "joe" fedőnevet a "joseph" felhasználónak.
A szerver automatikusan létrehozza a fedőneveket a keresztnév.vezetéknév és a keresztnév_vezetéknév formában minden felhasználónak valamint az "everyone" fedőnevet, amely a rendszer összes felhasználójára mutat.
Az fedőnevek azt is lehetővé teszik, hogy e-mail alias-okat hozzon létre virtuális domének és a felhasználók számára. Például továbbítani tudja "sales@virtualdomain1.com" címre jövő leveleket a "mary" felhasználónak és a"sales@virtualdomain2.com" -ra jövő leveleket a "john" felhasználónak. Mielőtt e-mail alias-okat hozna létre el kell készítenie a virtuális doméneket és a felhasználói fiókokat.
A fedőnevek mutathatnak egy másik fedőnévre is, bár ez egyszintűre van korlátozva. Például a "webmaster" fedőnév mutathat a "techsupport" fedőnévre ami pedig egy "ray" nevű felhasználóra mutat. Ez akkor hasznos, mikor egyetlen felhasználó felelős több feladatért. Ugyanis, ha az illető eltávozik a cégtől nem kell a fedőneveket több soron módosítani.
A fedőnevek módosítása, vagy eltávolítása a fedőnevek neve melletti parancsokra való kattintással végezhető el.
]]>Vegye figyelembe, hogy a jelentések generálása több percet is igénybevehet
]]>Ha a felhasználó tárhelyének mérete eléri a "türelmi határt", figyelmeztető üzenetet kap. Ha a felhasználó túllépi ezt a türelmi határt, vagy eléri az abszolút határt, nem tud több fájlt lementeni és nem tud e-mailt fogadni.
A 0 érték megadása bármely határértéknél kikapcsolja az adott felhasználói határértéket.
Minden felhasználó tárhelyébe beleszámít a felhasználó home könyvtára, az e-mail fiókja és a felhasználó bármely adattárban tárolt fájljai. ]]>
Secure Shell beállítások
Szabályozhatja a Secure Shell hozzáférést a szerverhez. A nyilvános beállítást csak tapasztalt rendszergazdák alkalmazzák távoli hibaelhárításhoz. Ha nincs rá különösebb oka ezt használni, akkor ajánlott ezt a beállítást a "Nincs hozzáférés" -re állítani. ]]>FTP beállítások
Az FTP hozzáférést is szabályozhatja a szerveren. Ajánlatos ezt a paramétert 'Nincs hozzáférés' -re állítani, hacsak nincs rá oka hogy másképp tegyen.Figyelem: ezek a beállítások korlátozzák a hozzáférést a szerverhez és felülírnak más beállításokat, beleértve az egyedi adattárak beállításait.
]]>PPTP beállítások
Engedélyezheti a PPTP hozzáférést a szerveréhez. Ha nincs szüksége a PPTP hozzáférésre, a 0 érték beállításával kikapcsolhatja azt. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Lehetséges engedélyezni a távoli hálózatokban lévő gépeknek a szerver kezelőhöz való hozzáférést azok hálózatának bejegyzésével. Használja a 255.255.255.255 alhálózati maszkot a gépek hozzáférésének korlátozásához. Az alhálózati maszk által meghatározott címtartományban minden gép HTTPS használatával hozzáférhet a szerver kezelőhöz.
]]>Soros konzol
Engedélyezheti a hozzáférést a szerver konzolhoz egy szerverre kapcsolt soros terminálon keresztül.]]>Telnet beállítások
Figyelem: A telnet jelenleg engedélyezett, de ez a szolgáltatás többé nem támogatott. A telnet alapvetően nem biztonságos és csak olyan körülmények között használja, ahol nem létezik más alternatíva. Állítsa ezt az opciót {$NO_ACCESS} -re és használjon secure shell-t ha távoli hozzáférésre van szüksége. Miután letiltja, a telnet nem jelenik meg többé ezen az oldalon. ]]>Bármely mezőt üresen hagyhatja, ha nincs rá szüksége.
A szöveg, amit lentebb beír tördelve lesz a szebb megjelenés érdekében. Ha új bekezdést kezd, hagyjon egy üres sort. Ha sortörést akar új bekezdés nélkül (például levelezési címek sorai után), akkor a
<BR>kódot kell beírni oda, ahol sortörést szeretne.
Ne használja ezt az opciót ha már testreszabta a weboldalát, mivel ez felülírja az "index.htm" fájlt a weboldalt tartalmazó könyvtárban.
]]>Kívánja folytatni?
]]>Módosíthat, zárolhat, eltávolíthat bármely fiókot, vagy megváltoztathatja a jelszavakat a fiókok neve mellett található parancsokra való kattintással .
Ha a fiók zároltra van jelölve, akkor az azt jelenti, hogy a felhasználónak jelszavat kell beállítani. Minden újonnan létrehozott fiók automatikusan zárolva van addig míg új jelszót be nem állítanak neki.
]]>Két speciális fedőnév generálódik minden fiókhoz. Ezek a fedőnevek lehetővé teszik a felhasználó számára, hogy alternatív e-mail címük legyen, amely tartalmazza a kereszt és vezetéknevet ponttal és aláhúzással elválasztva. Így a "betty" fiók "Betty" keresztnévvel és "Rubble" vezetéknévvel két fedőnevet kap, úgy mint betty.rubble és betty_rubble.
A címtár információk (részleg, cégnév, stb.) az alább látható alapértelmezettről, átállítható másra. A változtatás csak erre a felhasználóra lesz érvényes.
]]>Biztos benne, hogy zárolja ezt a fiókot? ]]>
Biztos benne, hogy törli ezt a fiókot? ]]>
Érvénytelen lekérdezés típus a "{$filename}".
]]>Ez a rendszer friss.
Minden frissítés telepítve van. ]]>Frissítések érhetők el
Frissítések érhetők el az ön rendszeréhez. Ajánlatos minél előbb telepíteni ezeket a frissítéseket. ]]>Ha nem tudja megváltoztatni a jelszavát, mivel elfelejtette a régit, a rendszergazda a Szerver kezelő használatával meg tudja változtatni a jelszavát.
]]>Metode pertama membuat salinan dari konfigurasi server dan file data pengguna, dan mengunduhnya pada desktop lokal anda melalui web browser anda. Saat ini total file konfigurasi dan data sekitar $tarsize. File backup akan sedikit lebih kecil dari ini, tergantung seberapa bisa data dimampatkan . Pilihan \"Periksa file backup dekstop\" option dapat digunakanuntuk memeriksa integritas dari sebuah file backup.
Metode tape backup menggunakan paket perangkat lunak $module untuk membackup seluruh harddisk kedalam tape setiap malam. Ini memerlukan tape drive yang di-support dan sebuah tape yang tidak di write-protect. Backup dilakukan secara otomatis pada waktu yang ditentukan setiap malam (dengan reminder yang secara otomatis di e-mailed kepada administrator pada hari berikutnya). Saat ini harddisk anda berisi data $dumpsize .
Kedua metode restore membolehkan anda untuk me-restore file konfigurasi dan data pengguna. Sebaiknya, restore dilakukan pada server yang baru di-install.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>File terakhir yang ada didalam file backup adalah file yang bernama "smbpasswd".
]]>Tape backup memerlukan tape drive yang didukung. Pesan peringatan akan dikirim kepada administrator pada saat yang ditentukan jika tape drive kosong.
]]>Pastikan bahwa anda sudah memasukkan backup tape yang benar kedalam tape drive sebelum melanjutkan.
Setelah proses restore selesai, anda harus me-reboot server.
]]>Hanya file yang ditandai dengan [Saved] yang berada didalam backup.
File backup diperiksa dari shared folder: ]]>Pastikan anda telah memilih backup yang benar yang akan dikembalikan sebelum melanjutkan proses.
Setelah proses restore selesai anda harus me-reboot server.
]]>Panel berikut akan menampilkan semua file dan direktori, sehingga anda dapat memilih yang anda ingin restore. Untuk membatasi jumlah file dan direktori yang ditampilkan pada panel ini, anda dapat memberi filtering expression, yang akan diterapkan sebagai regular expression pada nama yang ditampilkan.
Anda bertanggung jawab untuk tidak merestore file yang dapat menyebabkan fungsi server anda rusak..
Saat ini, file akan di-restore dari : ]]>
Tambah domain ]]>
Anda yakin menghapus domain ini?
]]>Corporate DNS Settings
]]>Delegate mail servers
Server anda dilengkapi dengan e-mail server yang lengkap, full-featured. Namun, untuk alasan tertentu jika anda ingin mendelegasikan pemrosesan e-mail ke server lain, isikan IP address dari system delegasi tersebut disini. Untuk opersai normal, biarkan field ini kosong. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
Untuk ETRN atau multi-drop, tentukan hostname atau IP address dari mail server sekunder. (Jika menggunakan setup e-mail standard , field ini dapat dikosongkan.) ]]>SMTP server
Server dapat mengirim pesan keluar secara langsung ke alamat tujuan (paling disarankan) atau dapat mengirimnya melalui SMTP server Penyedia Jasa Internet anda(disarankan jika anda memiliki sambungan internet yang tidak terpercaya atau menggunakan Jasa Internet rumahan). Jika menggunakan SMTP server Penyedia Jasar Internet anda, tentukan nama atau alamat IP-nya dibawah ini. Selain itu, biarkan field ini kosong. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>Pengiriman e-mail
]]>Anda yakin menghapus hostname ini? ]]>
Anda dapat menghapus information bay atau me-reset password-nya dengan meng-klik pada command yang ada di sebelah information bay. Jika warna information bay adalah merah, itu berarti password belum diubah dari default, dan harus diubah secepatnya.
]]>Semua file pada information bay ini akan dihapus.
Anda yakin menghapus information bay ini?
]]>- {$vhostList}
- {$vhostList}
SME Server tersedia secara bebas dibawah GNU General Public License dan hanya mungkin tercipta melalui usaha dari Komunitas SME Server. Walau demikian, ketersediaan dan kualitas dari SME Server adalah tergantung dari adanya pembiayaan, seperti biaya hosting, perangkat keras server , dll.
Karena itu, kami meminta sedikit donasi untuk menutupi cost dan membiayai pengembangan lebih lanjut.
Kunjungi http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ untuk menyumbang.
Software ini SAMA SEKALI TIDAK DIGARANSI. Silakan klik disini untuk melihat dukungan yang lebih terperinci, garansi dan informasi lisensi.
Untuk menjalankan fungsi pengaturan sistem, klik satu dari link menu disebelah kiri layar anda.
]]>Click here for a list of system administration functions.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" adalah alamat IP dari router dalam jaringan lokal anda untuk mencapai jaringan tambahan tersebut. ]]>
Server anda akan mengabulkan hak akses lokal ke {$totalHosts} alamat IP dalam range {$firstAddr} s.d {$lastAddr}.
Peringatan: Server FTP ProFTPd tidak dapat menangani subnet mask nonstandard ini. Spesifikasi yang lebih sederhana {$simpleMask} akan digunakan.
]]>Dukungan dan lisensi
Software ini diterbitkan dibawah syarat-syarat yang terdapat pada halaman Dukungan dan Lisensi. ]]>PERINGATAN: Penyalahgunaan dari fitur ini dapat secara serius mengancam keamanan dari jaringan anda. Jangan gunakan fitur ini dengan enteng, atau tanpa mengerti benar akibat dari melakukan hal ini.
]]>Nama printer hanya boleh terdiri dari huruf kecil dan angka, dan harus dimulai dengan huruf kecil. contoh "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" adalah nama yang valid.
]]>Dengan Pseudonym anda bisa membuat nama lain dari user atau grup yang telah ada. Contohnya , anda ingin membuat pseudonym "webmaster" untuk grup "pengembangweb" atau pseudonym "joe" untuk pengguna "joseph".
Server secara otomatis membuat pseudonym dalam bentuk firstname.lastname dan firstname_lastname untuk setiap userdalam sistem dan sebuah pseudonym "everyone" yang memuat semua user dalam sistem.
Pseudonym juga membuat anda dapat membuat alamat email alias untuk (virtual) domains dan pengguna yang valid. COntohnya anda dapat meneruskan "sales@virtualdomain1.com" ke pengguna "mary" dan "sales@virtualdomain2.com" ke pengguna "john". Anda harus membuat domain-domain dan akun pengguna sebelum membuat alamat email alias.
Pseudonyms juga dapat meneruskan ke pseudonyms yang lain, walaupun hal ini terbatas sampai satu langkah saja. Contoh pseudonym "webmaster" dapat meneruskan ke pseudonym "techsupport" yang kemudian meneruskan ke pengguna yang spesifik "ray". Hal ini berguna ketika satu pengguna bertanggung jawab untuk berbagai bagian dan sangat menolong sehingga tidak perlu mengubah pseudonym's yang terhubung dengan user tersebut pada saat user tersebut keluar dari organisasi.
Anda dapat mengubah atau menghapus pseudonym dengan cara meng-klik perintah yang bersangkutan disebelah pseudonym.
]]>Harap dicatat bahwa mungkin diperlukan beberapa menit untuk membuat laporan-laporan tersebut
]]>Jika pengguna tersebut melewati "Batasan dengan masa kelonggaran", peringatan akan dibuat. Jika batas ini melebihi satu minggu atau jika "Batas Absolut" telah tercapai, user tersebut tidak akan dapat menyimpan file lagi atau menerima email lagi.
Setting '0' pada kedua batasan meniadakan batasan pada user tersebut.
Ruang disk untuk setiap pengguna meliputi home directory pengguna, e-mail, dan segala berkas file yang dimiliki oleh user tersebut dalam information bays. ]]>
Pengaturan Secure Shell
Anda dapat mengkontrol akses Secure Shell ke server anda. Pengaturan untuk umum hanya dibolehkan oleh administrator berpengalaman untuk diagnosa dan penyelesaian masalah secara jarak jauh. Kami anjurkan untuk membiarkan parameter ini di set ke "No Access" kecuali anda punya alasan yang khusus. ]]>Pengaturan FTP
Anda juga dapat mengatur akses FTP ke server anda. Kami menganjurkan untuk membiarkan parameter ini ke 'no access' kecuali anda memiliki alasan khusus.Catatan: pengaruran tersebut membatasi akses ke server dan menimpa aturan lain, termasuk pada masing-masing information bays.
]]>Pengaturan PPTP
Anda dapat membolehkan akses PPTP ke server anda. Anda harus membiarkan fitur ini dalam kondisi disabled dengan cara mengisikan angka 0 kecuali anda memerlukan akses PPTP. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Adalah memungkinkan untuk membolehkan host di jaringan luar untuk mengakses server manager dengan memasukkan jaringan tersebut disini. Gunakan subnet mask dengan format 255.255.255.255 untuk membatasi akses host tertentu. Semua host dalam jangkauan yang ditentukan itu akan dapat mengakses server manager menggunakan HTTPS.
]]>Konsol Serial
Anda dapat membolehkan akses ke konsol server dari sebuah terminal yang terhubung melalui serial port pada server.]]>Pengaturan Telnet
PERINGATAN: Telnet saat ini di enable, tapi fitur ini tidak didukung lagi. Telnet kurang aman dan hanya boleh digunakan jika tidak ada pilihan lain. Anda harus mengganti opsi menjadi {$NO_ACCESS} dan menggunakan secure shell jika akses jarak jauh diperlukan. Sekali di-disable, telnet tidak akan muncul lagi di layar ini. ]]>Anda dapat membiarkan field kosong jika anda tidak memerlukannya.
Teks yang anda masukkan dibawah ini akan di line wrap untuk tampilan yang lebih bagus dalam halaman web anda. Kosongkan satu baris jika anda ingin memulai satu paragraf. Jika anda ingin membuat baris baru tanpa memulai paragraf baru (contohnya pada setiap baris dari alamat surat), ketikkan
<BR>di tempat anda ingin membuat baris baru.
Jangan gunakan cara ini jika anda telah memiliki halaman web, karena ini akan menimpa file "index.htm" di dalam situs web anda.
]]>Lanjutkan?
]]>Anda dapat mengubah, mengunci atau menghapus akun atau me-reset password akun dengan mengklik perintah yang sesuai.
Jika akun telah ditandai sedang terkunci, artinya bahwa password pengguna perlu di-reset. Harap diingat bahwa akun yang baru dibuatsecara otomatis terkunci sampai password telah diganti.
]]>Perhatikan bahwa dua nama pseudonym akan dibuat untuk setiap nama akun. Pseudonym tersebut dibuat agar terdapat akun email alternatif untuk user tersebut yaitu nama depan dan nama belakan yang terpisah dengan titik (.) dan garis bawah(_). Jadi untuk akun "betty" dengan nama depan"Betty" dan nama belakang "Rubble" dua pseudonym akan dibuat sebagai betty.rubble dan betty_rubble.
Informasi (department, perusahaan, etc.) dapat diganti dari nilai defaults dibawah ini. Perubahan hanya berlaku untuk user ini.
]]>Anda yakin mengunci akun ini? ]]>
Anda yakin menghapus akun ini? ]]>
Jenis laporan invalid "{$filename}".
]]>Sistem ini dalam kondisi mutakhir.
Semua update telah dipasang. ]]>Update tersedia
Tersedia update untuk sistem anda. Update ini harus diinstall secepat mungkin. ]]>Jika anda tidak dapat mengubah password karena anda lupa password lama, system administrator lokal anda dapat mengubah password anda menggunakan server manager.
]]>Il primo metodo crea una copia della configurazione e dei dati degli utenti e lo invia al desktop locale attraverso il browser. In questo momento, configurazione e dati occupano approssimativamente $tarsize. Il file di backup avrà dimensioni inferiori per merito della compressione. L'opzione \"Verifica desktop backup\" può essere utilizzata per verificare l'integrità del file di backup.
Il backup su nastro utilizza un software chiamato $module per copiare l'intero disco fisso su nastro ogni notte. Questa opzione richiede un'unità nastro supportata e un nastro non protetto da scrittura. Il backup viene effettuato automaticamente all'ora selezionata ogni notte (durante il giorno l'amministratore riceve una email con un promemoria per l'inserimento del nastro). Attualmente il disco fisso contiene $dumpsize di dati.
Entrambi i sistemi ripristinano la configurazione e i dati. Il ripristino dovrebbe essere effettuato su un server appena installato.
]]>Backup su nastro. Questo metodo utilizza il software $module per salvare l'intero contenuto del disco su nastro ogni notte. Il metodo richiede una unità nastro supportatta e un nastro non protetto da scrittura. Il backup viene eseguito automaticamente all'ora selezionata ogni notte (con un avviso inviato automaticamente all'amministratore durante la giornata). Attualmente il server contiene $dumpsize di dati.
Workstation backup. Questo metodo usa un software denominato dar per salvare la configurazione del server ed i dati su una condivisione di rete o su un disco rimovibile locale come ad esempio un disco USB. Si può configurare il numero di backup completi da conservare (a rotazione), e quanti backup incrementali eseguire per ogni backup completo conservato. Il backup viene eseguito automaticamente ogni giorno nell'orario selezionato. Attualmente configurazione e dati occupano approssimativamente $tarsize non compressi. Sul dispositivo di backup deve essere disponibile uno spazio libero pari ad almeno il doppio dello spazio occupato dai dati compressi.
Backup su Desktop. Questo metodo crea una copia della configurazione del server e dei dati e la salva sul desktop locale attraverso il browser web. Attualmente configurazione e dati occupano approssimativamente $tarsize. Il file di backup risulterà più piccolo di questa dimensione, in funzione di quanto siano comprimibili i file salvati. Il file può essere utilizzato per ripristinare il server dalla console dopo averlo copiato su un supporto rimovibile locale come un disco USB.
Tutti i metodi di backup consentono il ripristino completo di dati e configurazione. Il backup su workstation consente il ripristino di singoli file. In linea di principio il restore completo va utilizzato su un server di nuova installazione..
]]>Il backup su nastro richiede un'unità nastro supportata. L'amministratore riceverà una mail di avvertimento all'orario del promemoria se l'unità nastro è vuota.
]]>Assicurarsi di aver inserito il nastro desiderato nell'unità prima di procedere.
Al termine del ripristino sarà necessario riavviare il server.
]]>Soltanto i file marcati [Saved] sono contenuti nel backup.
I file di backup saranno verificati dalla condivisione di rete: ]]>Assicurarsi di scegliere dalla lista il backup corretto da ripristinare prima di procedere.
Al termine del ripristino sarà necessario riavviare il server.
]]>Il prossimo pannello mostrerà i file e le cartelle disponibili per poter scegliere quelli da ripristinare. Per limitare il numero di file e cartelle mostrati è possibile introdurre un filtro, applicato come una espressione regolare ai nomi visualizzati.
E' cura dell'utente non ripristinare file che potrebbero pregiudicare il corretto funzionamento del server.
I file saranno ripristinati da: ]]>
Aggiungi dominio ]]>
Siete sicuri di voler rimuovere questo dominio ?
]]>Configurazione DNS
]]>Mail server delegato
Il server SME include un e-mail server completo. Se per qualunque ragione è preferibile/necessario delegare la gestione della posta a un altro sistema, specificare l'indirizzo IP del server delegato. Normalmente questo campo deve rimanere vuoto. ]]>Impostazioni ETRN o multi-drop
Per ETRN o multi-drop, specificare il nome host o l'indirizzo IP del mail server secondario. (In caso di impostazioni standard, questo campo può rimanere vuoto). ]]>Server SMTP
Il server può consegnare i messaggi in uscita direttamente a destinazione (raccomandato nella maggior parte dei casi) oppure consegnarli attraverso il server SMTP del provider (raccomandato in caso di connessione inaffidabile o ADSL di tipo residenziale, IP dinamico, etc). Se si utilizza il server SMTP del provider, specificare il nome host o l'indirizzo IP sotto. Altrimenti lasciare vuoto. ]]>Ricezione E-mail
]]>Distribuzione E-mail
]]>Siete sicuri di voler rimuovere questo host ? ]]>
E' possibile rimuovere una i-bay o cambiare la password facendo clic sul corrispondente comando a fianco dell'i-bay. Se l'i-bay appare in rosso significa che la password non è ancora stata cambiata dal default e dovrebbe essere cambiata subito.
]]>Tutti i file contenuti in questa i-bay verranno cancellati.
Siete sicuri di voler rimuovere questa i-bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server è liberamente disponibile sotto licenza GPL (GNU General Public License) grazie all'impegno della comunità di sviluppatori. Mantenere la qualità di SME Server comporta diverse spese, tra cui l'hosting, l'hardware dei server, etc.
Chiediamo quindi una piccola donazione per coprire i costi e finanziare lo sviluppo.
a) Se siete una scuola, una chiesa, una organizzazione no-profit o un privato, sarà gradito un contributo per coprire le spese di hosting, manutenzione e sviluppo.
b) Se siete una azienda o un integratore di servizi e distribuite/installate SME per la vostra attività per generare profitto, siete invitati a fare una donazione commisurata al livello di guadagno prodotto ed al numero di server installati. Aiutate il progetto
Il software viene distribuito SENZA ALCUNA GARANZIA. Consultate click here per informazioni complete su assistenza, garanzia e licenza.
Per amministrare il sistema, fare clic su uno dei link nel menu alla sinistra dello schermo.
]]>Fare clic qui per una lista delle funzioni di amministrazione.
]]>Aggiungi rete ]]>
"Router" è l'indirizzo IP del router sulla rete locale attraverso il quale raggiungere la rete aggiuntiva. ]]>
Il server assegnerà privilegi di accesso locale a {$totalHosts} indirizzi IP nel range da {$firstAddr} a {$lastAddr}.
Attenzione: il server FTP ProFTPd non è in grado di gestire questa subnet mask non standard. Verrà usata la maschera semplice {$simpleMask}. ]]>
Supporto e licenza
Questo software è rilasciato secondo i termini descritti in Supporto e Licenza page. ]]>ATTENZIONE: l'uso improprio di questa funzione potrebbe compromettere seriamente la sicurezza della rete. Non utilizzare questa funzione con superficialità o senza comprenderne pienamente le implicazioni sulla sicurezza.
]]>Il nome della stampante può contenere soltanto lettere minuscole e numeri e deve iniziare con una lettera minuscola. Per esempio "hplaser", "epsonlp" e "canonbj" sono nomi validi.
]]>Gli pseudonimi permettono di creare nomi differenti per utenti o gruppi esistenti. Per esempio, potrebbe essere creato uno pseudonimo "webmaster" per il gruppo "sviluppo_web" oppure lo pseudonimo "gigi" per l'utente "luigi".
Il server crea automaticamente pseudonimi nella forma nome.cognome e nome_cognome per ogni utente del sistema e uno pseudonimo "everyone" che comprende tutti gli utenti del sistema.
Gli pseudonimi permettono anche di creare alias per domini (virtuali) e utenti. Per esempio, è possibile inoltrare "info@dominio-virtuale1.it" all'utente "maria" e "info@dominio-virtuale2.com" all'utente "luigi". Domini e utenti dovranno essere creati prima della creazione degli alias.
Gli pseudonimi possono inoltre puntare ad altri pseudonimi, limitatamente ad un solo livello di inoltro. Per esempio l'alias "webmaster" può puntare allo pseudonimo "support" che a sua volta inoltra l'email all'utente "paolo". Utile quando un utente ha più ruoli all'interno dell'azienda perché evita di cambiare lo pseudomino associato all'utente nel caso in cui la persona lasci l'azienda.
Per modificare o rimuovere uno pseudonimo fare clic sul corrispondente comando a fianco dello pseudonimo.
]]>Potrebbero essere necessari alcuni minuti per generare questi rapporti.
]]>Se l'utente supera il "Limite di avvertimento", verranno inviati degli avvisi. Se questo limite viene ecceduto per oltre una settimana o se viene raggiunto il "Limite assoluto", l'utente non potrà salvare nuovi file o ricevere posta.
Impostando a '0' uno dei limiti disabiliterà quel limite per l'utente corrispondente.
Lo spazio su disco di ogni utente include l'home directory, l'e-mail e tutti i file appartenenti all'utente nelle i-bay. ]]>
Impostazioni Secure Shell (ssh)
E' possibile impostare l'accesso ssh al server. L'impostazione pubblico dovrebbe essere abilitata solo da amministratori esperti per diagnosi e risoluzione problemi da remoto. Il valore raccomandato per questo parametro è "Nessun Accesso" a meno di specifiche ragioni contrarie. ]]>Impostazioni FTP
E' possibile controllare l'accesso FTP al server. Si consiglia di lasciare questo parametro a "Nessun Accesso" a meno di specifiche ragioni.Nota: queste impostazioni limitano l'accesso al server e hanno precedenza sulle altre impostazioni, comprese quelle per le singole i-bay.
]]>Impostazioni PPTP
E' possibile abilitare l'accesso PPTP al server. Questa funzionalità dovrebbe rimanere disabilitata impostando a 0 il valore, a meno che sia necessario l'accesso PPTP. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
E' possibile consentire l'accesso a computer su reti remote al server-manager, inserendo le reti abilitate qui. Utilizzare una subnet mask di 255.255.255.255 per limitare l'accesso ad un host specifico. I computer abilitati potranno accedere al server-manager in HTTPS.
]]>Console seriale
E' possibile accedere alla console del server da un terminale collegato a una porta seriale.]]>Impostazioni Telnet
ATTENZIONE: Telnet è abilitato, ma non più supportato. Telnet non è sicuro e dovrebbe essere usato solo in circostanze in cui non esistono alternative. L'opzione dovrebbe essere su {$NO_ACCESS} e dovrebbe essere utilizzato ssh in caso di accesso remoto. Una volta disabilitato, telnet non apparirà su questo schermo. ]]>E' possibile lasciare vuoto qualsiasi campo se necessario.
Il testo inserito sotto andrà a capo in automatico per una visualizzazione migliore nella pagina web. Lasciare una linea bianca per iniziare un nuovo paragrafo. Per forzare un ritorno a capo senza iniziare un nuovo paragrafo (per esempio dopo ogni linea di un indirizzo postale), digitare la sequenza di quattro caratteri
<BR>nel punto in cui si desidera l'interruzione di linea.
Non utilizzare questa opzione dopo aver già personalizzato il sito web, perché verrà sovrascritto il file "index.htm" nella cartella del sito web.
]]>Siete sicuri di voler continuare?
]]>E' possibile modificare, bloccare o rimuovere un utente o modificare la password facendo clic sul comando corrispondente a fianco dell'utente.
Se l'utente è bloccato, significa che la password deve essere modificata. Notare che gli utenti appena creati vengono automaticamente bloccati fino a quando non viene cambiata la password.
]]>Notare che verranno creati due pseudonimi speciali per ogni nuovo utente. Questi pseudonimi forniscono indirizzi email alternativi per l'utente, creati unendo nome e cognome con un punto (.) e un underscore (_). L'utente "mario" di nome "Mario" e cognome "Rossi" avrà due pseudonimi, mario.rossi e mario_rossi.
Le informazioni di rubrica (ufficio, azienda, etc.) possono essere modificate dai default sottostanti. Le modifiche verranno applicate solo a questo utente.
]]>Siete sicuri di voler bloccare questo utente? ]]>
Siete sicuri di voler rimuovere questo utente? ]]>
Tipo rapporto non valido "{$filename}".
]]>Il sistema è aggiornato.
Tutti gli aggiornamenti sono stati installati. ]]>Aggiornamenti disponibili
Ci sono aggiornamenti disponibili per il sistema. Installarli appena possibile. ]]>Fare clic sul pulsante Riconfigura in fondo a questa pagina per iniziare la procedura di riconfigurazione. Il sistema verrà riavviato automaticamente al termine della riconfigurazione
In caso di perdita della vecchia password, l'amministratore di sistema può impostare una nuova password utilizzando il server-manager.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>あなたが選んだ全てのバックアップファイルが見れる。
共有フォルダでバックアップファイルが確認できる : ]]>The tape backup requires a supported tape drive. A warning message will be sent to the administrator at the designated reminder time if the tape drive is empty.
]]>始める前に正しいバックアップファイルを選ぶように注意する
復元が終わったらサーバーを再起動しなければならない。
復元するバックアップファイルはここに : ]]>あなたが選んだ全てのバックアップファイルが見れる。
共有フォルダでバックアップファイルが確認できる : ]]>始める前に正しいバックアップファイルを選ぶように注意する
復元が終わったらサーバーを再起動しなければならない。
復元するバックアップファイルはここに : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this domain?
]]>Corporate DNS Settings
]]>Delegate mail servers
Your server includes a complete, full-featured e-mail server. However, if for some reason you wish to delegate e-mail processing to another system, specify the IP address of the delegate system here. For normal operation, leave this field blank. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
For ETRN or multi-drop, specify the hostname or IP address of your secondary mail server. (If using the standard e-mail setup, this field can be left blank.) ]]>SMTP server
The server can deliver outgoing messages directly to their destination (recommended in most cases) or can deliver them via your Internet provider's SMTP server (recommended if you have an unreliable Internet connection or are using a residential Internet service). If using your Internet provider's SMTP server, specify its hostname or IP address below. Otherwise leave this field blank. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>E-mail delivery
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
You can remove any information bay or reset its password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the information bay. If the information bay shows up in red, that means that the password has not yet been changed from the default, and should be changed soon.
]]>All files belonging to this information bay will be deleted.
Are you sure you wish to remove this information bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>Click here for a list of system administration functions.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>サポートと免許
このソフトはこの？によって免許されています]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>The printer name should contain only lower-case letters and numbers, and should start with a lower-case letter. For example "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" are valid names.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>Please note that it may take several minutes to generate these reports
]]>If the user exceeds the "Limit with grace period", warnings will be generated. If this limit is exceeded for longer than a week or if the "Absolute limit" is reached, the user will be unable to store any more files or receive any more e-mail.
A setting of '0' for either limit disables that limit for the corresponding user.
The disk space for each user includes the user's home directory, e-mail, and any files owned by the user in information bays. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>PPTP Settings
You can allow PPTP access to your server. You should leave this feature disabled by setting the value to the number 0 unless you require PPTP access. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
It is possible to allow hosts on remote networks to access the server manager by entering those networks here. Use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 to limit the access to the specified host. Any hosts within the specified range will be able to access the server manager using HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
You can allow access to the server console from a terminal connected to a server serial port.]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>You can leave any field blank if you do not need it.
The text that you enter below will be line wrapped for a nicer appearance in your web page. Leave a blank line whenever you want to start a new paragraph. If you need to force a line break without starting a new paragraph (for example after each line of a mailing address), then type the four-character sequence
<BR>where you would like each line break.
Do not use this option if you have already customized your web site, since it will overwrite the "index.htm" file in your web site directory.
]]>Do you wish to proceed?
]]>You can modify, lock or remove any account or reset the account's password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the account.
If the account is marked as locked, that means that the user's password needs to be reset. Please note that newly created accounts are automatically locked until the password is changed.
]]>Note that two special pseudonyms will be created for each new account. These pseudonyms provide the ability to have alternative mail accounts for that user which include their first name and last name separated with a period (.) and underscore (_). So, for the account "betty" with first name "Betty" and last name "Rubble" two pseudonyms are created as betty.rubble and betty_rubble.
The directory information (department, company, etc.) can be changed from the defaults shown below. The changes will apply only to this user.
]]>Are you sure you wish to lock this account? ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this account? ]]>
Invalid report type "{$filename}".
]]>This system is up to date.
All updates have been installed. ]]>Updates Available
There are updates available for your system. These updates should be installed as soon as possible. ]]>If you cannot change your password because you have forgotten the old one, your local system administrator can reset your password using the server manager.
]]>Den første metoden oppretter en kopi av server oppsettet og brukernes datafiler, og lagerer den på skrivebordet ditt via nettleseren. Konfigurasjonsfilene og bruker datafilene er ca $tarsize store. Backupfilen er noe mindre en dette avhengig av hvor komprimerbar dataene er. \"Verifiser skrivebord backup filen\" valget kan brukes til å sjekke integriteten til skrivebords backupfilen.
Tape backup metoden bruker et program kalt $module til å ta backup av hele harddisken til tape hver natt. Det krever en støttet tapestasjon og en tape som ikke er skrivebeskyttet. Backup blir kjørt automatisk til valgt tid hver natt (med en påminnelse automatisk sendt på e-post til administrator i løpet av dagen). Nå inneholder harddisken $dumpsize med data.
Begge gjenopprettings metoder tillater å gjenopprette oppsett og bruker datafiler. Ideelt, bør gjenoppretting foretas på en nyinstallert server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape backupen krever en støttet stasjon. En advarsel vil bli sendt til administratoren til angitt tid dersom tapestasjonen er tom.
]]>Du må forsikre deg om, at det rette bånd er satt inn i båndstasjonen innen gjenoppretting.
etter gjenopprettelsen skal serveren starte på nytt.
]]>Kun filer merket med [Lagret] ligger i sikkerhetskopien.
Filene i sikkerhetskopien blir kontrolleret fra den delte mappe: ]]>Du må sikre dig at du velger den rigtige sikkerhetskopi innen du fortsetter.
etter gjenopprettelsen skal serveren starte oms.
gjenopprettelsen vil ske fra: ]]>Du har ansvaret for ikke at gjenopprette filer, som vil kunne ødelegge din servers funksjoner.
Aktuelt, vil filene gjenopprettes fra: ]]>
Legg til domene ]]>
Er du sikker på at du vil fjerne dette domenet?
]]>Felles DNS Instillinger
]]>Delegere e-post servere
Server inkluderer et komplett, e-post system. Hvis du allikevel ønsker å delegere ansvaret for e-posthåndtering til et annet system, spesifiserer du IP adressen til systemet du ønsker å delegere til her. For normal operasjon, lar du feltet stå tomt. ]]>ETRN eller multi-drop instillinger
For ETRN eller multi-drop, spesifiser maskinnavn eller IP adressen til den sekundære e-post serveren. (Hvis du bruker standard e-post oppsett, lar du feltet stå tomt.) ]]>SMTP server
Serveren kan levere utgåede meldinger direkte til mottakeren (anbefalt i de fleste situasjoner) eller kan leveres via Internettilbyderens SMTP server (anbefalt hvis Internett tilkoblingen din er ustabil/ustadig, eller du bruker en hjemme internett tjeneste). Hvis du bruker din Internettilbyders SMTP server, spesifiser maskinnavn eller IP adresse nedenfor. Ellers lar du feltet være blankt. ]]>E-post mottak
]]>E-post levering
]]>Er du sikker på at du vil fjerne maskinnavnet? ]]>
Du kan fjerne en informasjons gruppe eller nulstille passordet ved å klikke på tilhørende link ved ønsket informasjonsgruppe. Hvis informasjonsgruppen vises i rødt, betyr det at passordet enda ikke er endret fra standard, og bør endres snarest.
]]>Alle filer som hører til gruppen vil bli slettet.
Er du sikker på at du vil fjerne informasjonsgruppen?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server er fritt tilgjenglig under GNU General Public License og er bare mulig gjennom insatsen fra SME Server felleskapet. Ikke desto minder er tilgjengligheten og kvaliteten på SME Server avhengig av økonomisk støtte for utgifter til hosting, server maskiner osv.
Derfor ber vi om at du avser en liten donasjon for å bidra til fremtidig utvikling.
Vennligst besøk http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ for å donere.
Programmet kommer uten noen form for garanti. Vennligst klikk her for å se detaljert støtte, garanti og lisensinformasjon.
For å utføre en systemadministrasjon funksjon, klikk på en av linkene i menyen på venstre siden av skjermen.
]]>Klikk her for en oversikt over systemadministrasjon funksjoner.
]]>"Ruter" bør være IP adressen til ruteren på ditt lokale nettverk som det ekstra nettverket kan nås. ]]>
Advarsel: ProFTPd FTP serveren kan ikke håndtere ikke standardiserte subnetmasker. Den enklere spesifikasjonen{$simpleMask} blir brukt isteden.
]]>Støtte og lisensiering
Dette programmet er sluppet under betingelsene på Støtte og Lisensiering siden. ]]>ADVARSEL: Misbruk av denne funksjonen vil kan redusere sikkerheten på ditt nettverk. Bruk funksjonen med forsiktighet, og ikke bruk den hvis du ikke er helt sikker på hva du gjør.
]]>Skrivernavnet kan bare inneholde små bokstaver og tall, og må starte med en liten bokstav. F.eks. er "hplaser", "epsonlp", og "canonbj" gyldige navn.
]]>Pseudonymer tillater deg å opprette andre navn på eksisterende brukere eller grupper. For eksempel, du ønsker kanskje å opprette et pseudonym "webmaster" for din "webutviklere" gruppe eller et pseudonym "jon" for brukeren "jonas".
Serveren oppretter automatisk pseudonymer i formatet fornavn.etternavn og fornavn_etternavn for hver bruker på systemet og et pseudonym "everyone" som inneholder alle brukere på systemet.
Pseudonymer tillater deg også å opprette e-post aliaser for gyldige (virtuelle) domener & brukere. For eksempel kan du videresende "salg@virtueltdomne1.com" til brukeren "mari" og "salg@virtueltdomene2.com" til brukeren "jon". Du må opprette domener og brukerkontoene før du oppretter e-post aliasene.
Pseudonymer kan også videresendes til andre pseudonymer, men det er begrenset til en videresending (et nivå). For eksempel pseudonymet "webmaster" kan videresendes til pseudonymet "techsupport" som så videresendes til en spesifikk bruker "ray". Dette er nyttig der en bruker er ansvarlig for flere roller og sparer mye ekstraarbeid den gangen det skal flyttes over til et annet pseudonym eller bruker for eksempel dersom personen slutter i organisasjonen.
Du kan endre eller fjerne et pseudonym ved å klikke på den korresponderende kommandoen ved siden av pseudonymet.
]]>Merk at det kan ta flere minutter å generere disse rapportene
]]>Hvis brukeren overskrider "Henstandsperiode", vil Det bli udsendt en advarsel. Overskrides denne grense i mer enn en uke eller hvis "Absolutt grense" blir nådd, vil brukeren ikke kunne lagre mer på serveren og heller ikke motta mer e-post.
Indstilles begge Verdier til '0' vil det ikke være noen begrensning for brukeren.
Diskplassen for hver bruker omfatter e-post, inneholdet i hjemmemappen, samt hva brukeren har lagret i diverse i-bays. ]]>
Sikker Shell Innstillinger
Du kan kontrollere Sikker Shell tilgang til serveren. Offentlig innstilling bør bare brukes av erfarne administratorer for fjern problem diagnostisering og løsning. Vi anbefaler å la denne innstillingen stå på "Ingen tilgang" med mindre du har en spesifikk grunn til å gjøre annet. ]]>FTP Innstillinger
du kan også kontrollere FTP tilgang til serveren. Vi anbefaler å la denne innstillingen til 'ingen tilgang' med mindre du har spesifikke grunner til å gjøre annet.Merk: disse innstillingene begrenser tilgangen til serveren og overstyrer andre innstillinger, inkludert de for individuell informasjon bays.
]]>PPTP Innstillinger
Du kan tillate PPTP tilgang til serveren. Du bør la denne muligheten være av ved å sette verdien til 0 med mindre det kreves PPTP tilgang. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Det er mulig å tillate maskiner på fjerne nettverk å få tilgang til server manager ved å skrive inn nettverkene her. Bruk en subnett maske på 255.255.255.255 for å begrense tilgangen til en spesifikk maskin. Enhver maskin innenfor det spesifiserte område vil ha tilgang til server manager ved å bruke HTTPS.
]]>Seriell konsoll
Du kan tillate tilgang til server console fra en terminal koblet til en serieport.]]>Telnet Innstillinger
ADVARSEL: Telnet er mulig, men denne muligheten er ikke lenger støttet. Telnet er usikkert og bør bare brukes under omstendigheter hvor ingen andre muligheter finnes. Du bør endre dette til {$NO_ACCESS} og bruke sikkert shell hvis fjerntilgang er påkrevd. Når dette blir slått av, vil ikke lenger telnet vises på denne skjermen. ]]>Du kan la felter du ikke trenger stå tomme.
Teksten du skriver inn vil bli tilpasset sidebredden for et penere utseende i nettleseren. Legg til en blank linje der du ønsker et nytt avsnitt. Hvis du ønsker et linjeskift uten å opprette et nytt avsnitt (for ekempel etter hver linje i en liste med epostadresser), skriver du inn denne fire tegns kombinasjonen
<BR>der linjeskift skal være.
Ikke bruk dette valget hvis du allerede har tilpasset din webside, da det vil overskrive "index.htm" filen i webside mappen.
]]>Ønsker du å fortsette?
]]>Du kan endre, låse eller fjerne kontoer eller nullstille kontoens passord ved å klikke på tilhørende kommando ved siden av kontoen.
Hvis kontoen er markert som låst, betyr det at brukerens passord må nullstilles. Merk at nyopprettede kontoer automatisk er låst inntil passordet endres.
]]>Merk at to spesielle pseudonymer vil bli opprettet for hver nye konto. Disse pseudonymene gir muligheten til å ha alternative e-post kontoer for den brukeren som inneholder fornavn og etternavn adskilt med punktum(.) og understrek (_). Så, for kontoen "betty" med fornavnet "Betty" og etternavnet "Rubble" blit to pseudonymer opprettet som betty.rubble og betty_rubble.
Adressebokinformasjonen (avdeling, firma, osv.)kan bli endret fra standard vist nedenfor. Endringene vil kun gjelde for denne brukeren.
]]>Er du sikker på at du vil låse kontoen? ]]>
Er du sikker på at du vil fjerne kontoen? ]]>
Ugyldig rapport type "{$filename}".
]]>Systemet er oppdatert.
Alle oppdateringer er installert. ]]>Oppdateringer tilgjenglig
Det er oppdateringer tilgjenglig for ditt system. Disse oppdateringene bør installeres så snart som mulig. ]]>Har du glemt ditt gamle passord, kan den lokale system administratoren nulstille passordet dit via server manager.
]]>De eerste methode creëert een kopie van de server configuratie en gebruikers bestanden en download het naar het bureaublad over uw webbrowser. Op dit moment is de omvang van uw configuratie en gebruikers bestanden ongeveer $tarsize. Het backup bestand zal wat kleiner zijn afhankelijk van hoe de bestanden te comprimeren zijn. De \"Controleer bureaublad backup bestand\" optie kan gebruikt worden om de integriteit van het backup bestand te testen.
De tape backup methode gebruikt een software pakket genaamd $module om elke nacht de volledige harddisk naar tape te schrijven. Dit vereist een een ondersteunde tape drive en een tape die niet beveiligd is tegen schrijven. De backup wordt automatisch uitgevoerd op de ingestelde tijd 's nachts (met een herinnering e-mail naar de beheerder gedurende de dag). Op dit moment bevat uw vaste schijfstation $dumpsize aan data.
Beide methodes maken herstellen van configuratie en gebruikers bestanden mogelijk. Het verdient de voorkeur de herstel operatie uit te voeren op een vers geïnstalleerde server.
]]>Tape Backup: Deze methode maakt gebruik van een software pakket genaamd $module om uw gehele harddisk elke nacht naar tape te schrijven. Hiervoor is een ondersteunde tape drive nodig en een tape welke niet schrijfbeveiligd is. De backup wordt elke nacht automatisch op de geselecteerde tijd uitgevoerd (met een automatische herinnering welke gedurende de dag per e-mail aan de beheerder gestuurd wordt). Momenteel bevat uw hard disk $dumpsize aan gegevens.
Werkstation Backup: Deze methode maakt gebruik van een software pakket genaamd dar om uw configuratie- en gegevensbestanden elke nacht naar een gedeelde netwerkschijf of een lokale verwisselbare schijf zoals een USB schijf. U kunt instellen hoeveel roterende backup sets worden bewaard, en hoeveel incrementele backups er in elke set zijn. De backup wordt dagelijks automatisch uitgevoerd op de geselecteerde tijd. De huidige ongecomprimeerde configuratie- en gegevensbestandgrootte is ongeveer $tarsize. Op de gedeelde backup schijf moet ongeveer twee maal de gecomprimeerde gegevensgrootte beschikbaar zijn.
Backup naar Bureaublad: Deze methode maakt een kopie van uw configuratie- en gegevensbestanden, en download deze naar uw lokale desktop via uw webbrowser. De huidige configuratie- en gegevensbestandsgrootte is ongeveer $tarsize. Het backup bestand zal iets kleiner zijn, afhankelijk van de comprimeerbaarheid van de gegevens. Dit bestand kan gebruikt worden om uw server te herstellen vanaf het console wanneer u het bestand kopieert naar een lokale verwisselbare schijf, zoals een USB-schijf.
Alle backup methoden maken het mogelijk uw configuratie en gegevensbestanden te herstellen. Werkstation Backup biedt daarnaast ook de mogelijkheid individuele bestanden te herstellen. Bij voorkeur dient U een volledig herstel uit te voeren op een schoon geïnstalleerde server.
]]>De tape backup heeft een ondersteund tape station nodig. Een opgelet bericht zal naar de administrator verzonden worden op het vastgestelde herinneringstijdstip als het tape station leeg is.
]]>Kijk na of u de benodigde backup tape in het tape station heeft geplaatst vooraleer te starten.
Nadat het herstel voltooid is moet u de server herstarten.
]]>Alleen bestanden gemerkt met [Saved] zullen zich in de backup bevinden.
Backup bestanden zijn gecontroleerd vanaf de gedeelde map : ]]>Controleer dat u de juiste backup selecteert vooraleer door te gaan.
Nadat het herstel voltooid is moet u de server herstarten.
Backup wordt hersteld vanaf : ]]>Het volgende paneel toont beschikbare bestanden en mappen zodat u diegene kan selecteren die u nodig heeft. Om het aantal bestanden en mappen te beperken kan u nu een filter ingeven, toegepast als een reguliere expressie op de getoonde namen.
U heeft de verantwoordelijkheid om bestanden die het functioneren van uw systeem te beschadigen niet te herstellen.
Momenteel worden bestanden hersteld vanaf: ]]>
Voeg domein toe ]]>
Bent u zeker dat u dit domein wil verwijderen?
]]>Ondernemings DNS instellingen
]]>Delegeer mail servers
Uw server bevat een complete, volledig uitgeruste e-mail server. Als u, om een specifieke reden het e-mail verkeer wilt delegeren naar een ander systeem, geef dan hier het IP adres van de server voor delegatie. Voor normaal gebruik, laat dit veld leeg. ]]>ETRN of multi-drop instellingen
Voor ETRN of multi-drop, specificeer de hostnaam of het IP adres van uw tweede mail server. (Als u de standaard e-mail opzet gebruikt, laat u dit veld leeg.) ]]>SMTP server
De server kan uitgaande berichten direct afleveren op de bestemming (aanbevolen in de meeste gevallen) of kan ze afleveren via de SMTP server van uw provider (aanbevolen als u een onbetrouwbare Internet verbinding hebt of als u een residentiële Internet service gebruikt). Als u de SMTP server van uw provider gebruikt, specificeer de hostnaam of het IP adres hieronder. Anders mag u dit veld leeglaten. ]]>E-mail ontvangst
]]>E-mail bezorging
]]>Weet u zeker dat u deze systeemnaam wilt verwijderen? ]]>
Elke informatie-baai kan worden verwijderd of het wachtwoord kan worden hersteld door op het corresponderende commando te klikken achter de betreffende informatie-baai. Als de informatie-baai in het rood wordt aangegeven betekend dit dat het standaard wachtwoord nog niet is aangepast en dat dit op korte termijn nog dient te gebeuren.
]]>Alle bestanden welke zich in deze informatie-baai bevinden zullen verloren gaan.
Weet u zeker dat u deze informatie-baai wilt verwijderen?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server is vrij te verkrijgen onder de GNU General Public License en is enkel mogelijk door de inspanningen van de SME Server gemeenschap. Desalniettemin, de beschikbaarheid en kwaliteit van SME Server is afhankelijk van de dekking van de kosten zoals die van hosting, server hardware, etc.
Dien ten gevolge vragen wij u om een donatie om onze kosten te dekken en te voorzien in de verdere ontwikkeling.
a) Bent u een school, kerk, non-profit organisatie of individu welke SME gebruikt voor persoonlijke doeleinden, dan zouden we het appreciëren indien u binnen uw vermogen doneert tegemoetkoming voor onze kosten betreffende hosting, onderhoud en ontwikkeling.
b) Bent u een bedrijf of een integrator welke SME implementeert ten behoeve van uw werk voor het genereren van inkomsten, dan verwachten wij een donatie evenredig met de hoeveelheid winst die u hiermee maakt en het aantal servers welke u in gebruik heeft. Alstublieft, help het project
Deze software komt met ABSOLUUT GEEN GARANTIE. Klik hier voor een gedetailleerd rapport, garantie- en licentie informatie.
Om systeem administratie taken uit te voeren klik op een van de items uit het menu aan de linker zijde van het scherm.
]]>Klik hier voor een lijst met systeem administratieve functies.
]]>"Router" dient het IP adres van de router op het lokale netwerk te zijn via welke het additionele netwerk te bereiken is. ]]>
De server zal lokale toegangsprivileges toekennen aan {$totalHosts} IP adressen in het bereik {$firstAddr} tot {$lastAddr}.
Waarschuwing: de ProFTPd FTP server herkent dit niet-standaard deelnetwerkmasker niet. De versimpelde specificatie {$simpleMask} zal in plaats hiervan worden gebruikt.
]]>Ondersteuning en licenties
Deze software is uitgegeven onder de voorwaarden zoals deze zijn benoemd in de Ondersteuning en Licenties page. ]]>WAARSCHUWING: Verkeerd gebruik van deze optie kan de veiligheid van het netwerk ernstig schaden. Gebruik deze mogelijkheid niet luchthartig en zonder de strekking en gevolgen volledig te begrijpen.
]]>De printernaam mag alleen kleine letters en cijfers bevatten en moet met een kleine letter beginnen. Bijvoorbeeld: "hplaser", "epsonlp" en "canonbj" zijn geldige namen.
]]>Pseudoniemen laten u ook toe om andere namen aan te maken voor bestaande gebruikers of groepen. U kan bijvoorbeeld een pseudoniem "webmaster" maken voor een groep "webdevelopers" of een pseudoniem "joe" voor een gebruiker "joseph".
De server voegt automatisch voor elke gebruiker pseudoniemen toe onder de vorm voornaam.familienaam en voornaam_familienaam en een pseudoniem "everyone" dat alle gebruikers op het systeem bevat.
Pseudoniemen laten u ook toe om e-mail pseudoniemen aan te maken voor (virtuele) domeinen en gebruikers. U kan bijvoorbeeld "sales@virtualdomain1.com" laten doorsturen naar gebruiker "mary" en "sales@virtualdomain2.com" naar gebruiker "john". U dient de domeinen en gebruikers toe te voegen vooraleer u de e-mail pseodoniem kan toevoegen.
Pseudoniemen kunnen ook worden doorgestuurd naar andere pseudoniemen, hoewel dit beperkt is. Het pseudoniem "webmaster" kan bijvoorbeeld worden doorgestuurd naar het pseudoniem "techsupport" welke op zijn beurt kan worden doorgestuurd naar een gebruiker "ray". Dit is handig indien een gebruiker meerdere functies vervult en hiermee wordt vermeden dat pseudoniemen veelvuldig moeten worden aangepast indien een gebruiker de organisatie verlaat.
U kan een pseudoniem wijzigen of verwijderen door op de overeenkomende opdracht naast het pseudoniem te klikken.
]]>Opm.: het kan enkele minuten duren om deze rapporten te genereren
]]>Als de gebruiker over de "Limiet met speling" gaat zullen er waarschuwingen worden gegeneerd. Als deze limiet langer dan een week wordt overschreden of als de "Vaste limiet" is bereikt zal de gebruiker geen bestanden meer kunnen opslaan of e-mail kunnen ontvangen.
Een instelling van '0' voor beide limieten zet de limit uit voor betreffende gebruiker.
De schijfruimte voor elke gebruiker is inclusief de home directory, e-mail en elk bestand in de informatie baaien waarvan de eigendomsrechten zijn toegekend. ]]>
Beveiligde shell instellingen
U kunt de beveiligde shell toegang tot uw server beheren. Publieke toegang mag alleen door ervaren systeembeheerders worden ingeschakeld voor probleemoplossingen op afstand. We raden aan om deze instelling op "Geen toegang" te laten staan tenzij u een specifieke reden hebt om dit te niet te doen. ]]>FTP instellingen
U kunt de FTP toegang tot uw server beheren. Wij raden u aan deze instellingen op 'Geen toegang' te laten staan tenzij u een specifieke reden hebt om dit niet te doen.Merk op dat deze instellingen de toegang tot de server beperken en andere instellingen overschrijven, inclusief deze voor afzonderlijke informatie-baaien.
]]>PPTP instellingen
U kunt via PPTP toegang tot uw server verlenen. Tenzij u PPTP toegang nodig heeft, laat u deze optie het beste uitgeschakeld door als waarde het getal 0 in te geven. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
De mogelijkheid bestaat om hosts op een extern netwerk toegang te geven tot de Server Manager door deze netwerken hier in te geven. Gebruik het subnet masker 255.255.255.255 om de toegang te beperken tot de gespecificeerde host. Elke host binnen het opgegeven bereik zal via HTTPS toegang kunnen verkrijgen tot de Server Manager.
]]>Seriële console
U kunt toegang verlenen tot de server console vanaf een terminal die is aangesloten op een seriële poort van de server.]]>Telnet instellingen
WAARSCHUWING: Telnet is momenteel ingeschakeld, maar deze optie wordt niet langer ondersteund. Telnet is onveilig en mag alleen worden gebruikt indien er praktisch gezien geen alternatieven bestaan. Het is aan te raden de optie te wijzigen in {$NO_ACCESS} en gebruik te maken van beveiligde shell indien toegang op afstand noodzakelijk is. Eenmaal uitgeschakeld, zal telnet niet meer op dit scherm verschijnen. ]]>U kan een vakje leeg laten indien u het niet nodig heeft.
De tekst die u ingeeft wordt met automatische terugloop getoond voor een mooiere weergave van uw webpagina. Voer een lege regel in telkens u een nieuwe paragraaf wilt beginnen (bijvoorbeeld na iedere regel met een mailinglijst adres). Indien u een regeleinde wilt forceren zonder een nieuwe paragraaf te beginnen, typ dan de code
<BR>op de plaats waar u de regeleinde wilt.
Gebruik deze optie niet indien u reeds een aangepaste website hebt, vermits het "index.htm" bestand zal worden overschreven.
]]>Wilt u verder gaan?
]]>U kan een account wijzigen, vergrendelen of verwijderen of het wachtwoord opnieuw instellen door op de corresponderende opdracht te klikken naast de account.
Een vergrendelde account betekent dat het wachtwoord van deze account opnieuw moet worden ingesteld. Houd er rekening mee dat nieuw aangemaakte accounts automatisch worden vergrendeld tot het wachtwoord opnieuw is ingesteld.
]]>Merk op dat voor elke account twee speciale pseudoniemen worden aangemaakt. Deze pseudoniemen geven de mogelijkheid om alternatieve mail accounts aan een gebruiker te geven welke de voornaam en familienaam gescheiden door een punt (.) en laag streepje (_). Bijvoorbeeld, voor de account "betty", met voornaam "Betty" en familienaam "Rubble", worden twee pseudoniemen aangemaakt: betty.rubble en betty_rubble.
De directory gegevens (afdeling, bedrijf, enz.) kunnen hieronder worden aangepast. De wijzigingen zullen alleen op deze gebruiker van toepassing zijn.
]]>Weet U zeker dat U deze account wilt vergrendelen? ]]>
Bent U zeker dat U deze gebruikersaccount wilt verwijderen? ]]>
Ongeldig rapporttype "{$filename}".
]]>Dit systeem is up-to-date.
Alle updates zijn geïnstalleerd. ]]>Updates beschikbaar
Er zijn updates beschikbaar voor uw systeem. Het is aangeraden om deze updates zo snel mogelijk te installeren. ]]>Indien u uw wachtwoord niet kan wijzigen omdat u het huidige vergeten bent, dan kan uw systeembeheerder uw wachtwoord opnieuw instellen via deServer Manager.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>The tape backup requires a supported tape drive. A warning message will be sent to the administrator at the designated reminder time if the tape drive is empty.
]]>Ensure that you have loaded the desired backup tape into the tape drive before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
]]>Only files flagged with [Saved] are contained in the backup.
Backup files are verified from shared folder : ]]>
Ensure that choose the right backup to restore below before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
Backup will be restored from : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this domain?
]]>Corporate DNS Settings
]]>Delegate mail servers
Your server includes a complete, full-featured e-mail server. However, if for some reason you wish to delegate e-mail processing to another system, specify the IP address of the delegate system here. For normal operation, leave this field blank. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
For ETRN or multi-drop, specify the hostname or IP address of your secondary mail server. (If using the standard e-mail setup, this field can be left blank.) ]]>SMTP server
The server can deliver outgoing messages directly to their destination (recommended in most cases) or can deliver them via your Internet provider's SMTP server (recommended if you have an unreliable Internet connection or are using a residential Internet service). If using your Internet provider's SMTP server, specify its hostname or IP address below. Otherwise leave this field blank. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>E-mail delivery
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
Możesz usunąć każdy magazyn lub zresetować hasło klikając w odpowiednie polecenie w obok magazynu. Jeśli magazyn pojawi się na czerwono, oznacza to, że hasło nie zostało zmienione z domyślnej wartości i powinny zostać zmienione.
]]>Wszystkie dane należące do tego magazynu zostaną usunięte.
Czy jesteś pewien, że chcesz usunąć ten magazyn danych?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server jest dystrybucją ogólnodostępną, rozprowadzaną na licencji GNU GPL i jest tylko dzięki wysiłkom społeczności SME Server. Jednakże, dostępność i jakość SME Server jest uzależniona od naszych wydatków, jak koszty hostingu, serwera, itp.
Proszę odwiedzić http://www.smeserver.org/donate/, aby wesprzeć pieniężnie projekt.
Ten projekt jest rozprowadzany ABSOLUTNIE BEZ ŻADNEJ GWARANCJI. Proszę tutaj kliknąć, aby wyświetlić szczegóły wsparcia, gwarancji i licencji.
Aby przygotować funkcję administracji systemem, kliknij na jeden z hiperłączy w menu po lewej stronie monitora.
]]>Kliknij tutaj aby zobaczyć listę funkcji administracji systemem.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>Wsparcie i licencjonowanie
Te oprogramowanie jest wydane na warunkach podanych na tej stronie. ]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>The printer name should contain only lower-case letters and numbers, and should start with a lower-case letter. For example "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" are valid names.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>Please note that it may take several minutes to generate these reports
]]>If the user exceeds the "Limit with grace period", warnings will be generated. If this limit is exceeded for longer than a week or if the "Absolute limit" is reached, the user will be unable to store any more files or receive any more e-mail.
A setting of '0' for either limit disables that limit for the corresponding user.
The disk space for each user includes the user's home directory, e-mail, and any files owned by the user in information bays. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>Ustawienia PPTP
Możesz zezwolić na dostęp do sieci poprzez PPTP. Powinieneś zostawić wyłączoną usługę, poprzez ustawienie tej wielkości na 0, chyba że potrzebujesz dostępu poprzez PPTP. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Możliwe jest, aby zezwolić hostom w sieci zdalnej do dostępu do menedżera serwera poprzez wpisanie tutaj tych sieci. Użyj maski od 255.255.255.255, aby ograniczyć dostęp do poszczególnych hostów. Wszystkie hosty mieszczące się w randze, będą miały dostęp do menedżera serwera poprzez protokół HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
You can allow access to the server console from a terminal connected to a server serial port.]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>You can leave any field blank if you do not need it.
The text that you enter below will be line wrapped for a nicer appearance in your web page. Leave a blank line whenever you want to start a new paragraph. If you need to force a line break without starting a new paragraph (for example after each line of a mailing address), then type the four-character sequence
<BR>where you would like each line break.
Do not use this option if you have already customized your web site, since it will overwrite the "index.htm" file in your web site directory.
]]>Do you wish to proceed?
]]>You can modify, lock or remove any account or reset the account's password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the account.
If the account is marked as locked, that means that the user's password needs to be reset. Please note that newly created accounts are automatically locked until the password is changed.
]]>Note that two special pseudonyms will be created for each new account. These pseudonyms provide the ability to have alternative mail accounts for that user which include their first name and last name separated with a period (.) and underscore (_). So, for the account "betty" with first name "Betty" and last name "Rubble" two pseudonyms are created as betty.rubble and betty_rubble.
The directory information (department, company, etc.) can be changed from the defaults shown below. The changes will apply only to this user.
]]>Are you sure you wish to lock this account? ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this account? ]]>
Invalid report type "{$filename}".
]]>This system is up to date.
All updates have been installed. ]]>Updates Available
There are updates available for your system. These updates should be installed as soon as possible. ]]>Jeżeli nie możesz zmienić hasło, ponieważ zapomniałeś stare, twój administrator może je zmienić używając menedżera serwera.
]]>O primeiro método cria uma cópia da configuração de seu servidor e arquivos de dados dos usuários e permite o download deles para seu micro local via um navegador internet. Atualmente sua configuração e dados totalizam aproximadamente $tarsize. O arquivo de backup será algo menor que isso, dependendo de quão comprimível seus dados forem. A opção \"Verificar arquivo de backup para desktop\" pode ser usado para verificar a integridade de um arquivo de backup para o desktop.
O método de backup em fita usa um pacote de software chamado $module para fazer o backup de seu disco rígido inteiro para a fita todas as noites. Isto requer um drive de fita suportado e que a fita não esteja protegida contra gravação. O backup é feito automaticamente no horário selecionado a cada noite (com um lembrete sendo enviado automaticamente por e-mail ao administrador durante o dia). Atualmente seu disco rígido contém $dumpsize de dados.
Todos métodos de restauração permitem que você restaure sua configuração e arquivos de dados dos usuários. O método de backup para micro da rede local permite um restauração de arquivos individuais. Idealmente um backup completo deveria ser restaurado num servidor recém instalado..
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>O último arquivo contido no arquivo de backup deverá ser o arquivo chamado "smbpasswd".
]]>O backup para fita requer um drive compatível. Uma mensagem de aviso será enviada para o administrador no tempo desejado se o drive de fita estiver vazio.
]]>Certifique-se de ter inserido o tape desejado no tape drive antes de proceder a restauração.
Depois da completada a restauração você tem que reinicializar o servidor.
]]>Você verá todos arquivos contidos no backup selecionado.
Arquivos de backup são verificados a partir do compartilhamento: ]]>Assegure-se de escolher o backup correto antes de continuar o procedimento de restauração.
Depois da terminada a restauração você PRECISA reinicializar o servidor.
O backup será restaurado de: ]]>A próxima tela mostrará todos arquivos e diretórios disponíveis para que você escolha aqueles que deseja restaurar. Para diminuir o número de arquivos e diretórios mostrados nesta tela, você poderá inserir agora uma expressão de filtragem, aplicada como expressão regular aos nomes mostradosto.
Você tem a responsabilidade de não restaurar arquivos que poderiam fazer o servidor parar de funcionar.
Os arquivos serão restaurados de : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Tem certeza que deseja remover este domínio?
]]>Configuração de DNS corporativo
]]>Delegação de servidor de correio
Seu servidor inclui um servidor de correio eletrônico completo. Entretanto, se por alguma razão voce desejar delegar o processamento de correio para outro sistema, especifique o endereço IP do sistema desejado aqui. Para operações normais deixe este campo em branco. ]]>Configuração ETRN ou multi-drop
Para ETRN ou multi-drop, especifique o nome do host ou endereço IP de seu servidor secundário de correio. (Numa configuração padrão, este campo pode ficar em branco.) ]]>Servidor SMTP
O servidor pode enviar mensagens diretamente para seu destino (recomendado na maioria dos casos) ou pode enviá-las via servidor SMTP de seu provedor internet (recomendado se seu provedor de Internet (recomendado se voce possui uma conexão não confiável ou está usando internet residencial). Se estiver usando o servidor SMTP de seu provedor de Internet, especifique o hostname ou endereço IP abaixo. Caso contrário deixe esses campos em branco. ]]>Recepção de e-mail
]]>Entrega de E-mail
]]>Voce tem certeza que deseja remover este nome de host? ]]>
Voce pode remover qualquer informação do compartilhamento ou resetar a senha clicando no comando correspondente próximo ao compartilhamento. Se o compartilhamento estiver em vermelho, isto significa que a senha ainda não foi definida, e deverá ser trocada tão logo possível.
]]>Todos os arquivos pertencentes a este compartilhamento serão apagados.
Você tem certeza que deseja remover este compartilhamento?
]]>- {$vhostList}
Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU General Public License e somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contuado, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar maiores desenvolvimentos.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem QUALQUER GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>Click aquie para uma lista de funções de administração do sistema.
]]>Adicionar rede ]]>
"Router" deverá ser o endereço IP do roteador de sua rede local pelo qual a rede adicional será alcançada. ]]>
Seu servidor irá garantir privilegios de acesso local para {$totalHosts} endereços IP na faixa de {$firstAddr} à {$lastAddr}.
Aviso: o servidor FTP ProFTP não pode manusear essas máscaras de rede não -padrão. A especificação simples {$simpleMask} será usada.
]]>Suporte Técnico e Licenciamento
Este software é disponibilizado de acordo com os termos descritos no Painel Suporte e Licenciamento. ]]>AVISO: O mau uso deste recurso pode comprometer seriamente a segurança de sua rede. Não use esse recurso sem seriedade, ou sem uma compreensão profunda das implicações de suas ações.
]]>O nome da impressora somente deve conter letras minúsculas e números, e deve iniciar com letra minúscula. Por exemplo "hplaser", "epsonlp", e "canonbj" são nomes válidos.
]]>Isso permite você criar outros nomes para um usuário ou grupo de usuários existente. Por exemplo, você pode querer criar um pseudônimo "webmaster" para seu grupo "webdevelopers" ou o pseudônimo "ze" para o usuário "jose".
O servidor criará automaticamente criará como primeironome.últimonome para cada usuário do sistema e um pseudônimo "everyone" para todos os usuários do sistema.
Você pode modificar ou remover um pseudônimo clicando no comando correspondente próximo ao pseudônimo.
]]>Por favor, note que para geração de alguns destes relatórios podem ser necessários vários minutos
]]>Se o usuário exceder ao "Limite de período cedido", avisos serão gerados. Se este limite exceder mais de uma semana ou se o "Limite absoluto" for alcançado, o usuário não poderá mais salvar arquivos ou receber mensagens.
Configurar para '0' para qualquer destes limites desabilita o controle de cota para o usuário correspondente.
O espaço em disco para cada usuário inclui o diretório particular (home), mensagem e os arquivos pertencentes ao usuário nos compartilhamentos. ]]>
Configuração de shell segura
Você pode controlar acesso ao Shell Seguro para seu servidor. A configuração pública deve somente ser habilitada por administradores experientes para resolução e diagnóstico de problemas. Nós recomendamos deixar este parâmetro configurado para "Acesso negado" a não ser que voce tenha uma razão específica para fazer o contrário. ]]>Configurar FTP
Você pode também controlar o acesso FTP para o seu servidor. Nós recomendamos deixar esse parâmetro configurado para 'acesso negado' a não ser que você tenha uma razão específica para fazer o contrário.Nota: essas configurações limitam o acesso ao servidor e sobrepõem-se outras configurações, incluindo aquelas para compartilhamentos individuais.
]]>Configurar PPTP
Você pode habilitar acesso PPTP ao seu servidor. Você deve deixar este configuração desabilitada entrando com o número 0 (zero) a não ser que precise de acesso PPPT. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
É possível permitir que hosts em uma rede remota acessem o gerenciador do servidor entrando essas redes aqui. Use uma máscara de subrede de 255.255.255.255 para limitar o acesso a um determinado host. Qualquer host dentro da faixa especificada estará habilitado a acessar o gerenciador do servidor usando HTTPS.
]]>Console serial
Você pode permitir o acesso ao console do servidor de um terminal conectado a porta serial.]]>Configuraração telnet
AVISO: Telnet está atualmente habilitada, mas esta opção não é mas suportada. Telnet é inerentemente insegura e somente deve ser usada numa circunstância onde uma prática alternativa não exista. Você deve trocar essa opção para {$NO_ACCESS} e usar shell segura se acesso remoto for necessário. Uma vez desabilitada, telnet não irá mais aparecer nessa tela. ]]>Voce pode deixar qualquer campo em branco se voce não precisar deles.
O texto que voce entrar abaixo será alinhado e formatado para uma bonita aparência de sua web page. Deixe uma linha em branco quando voce desejar iniciar um novo parágrafo. Se voce precisar forçar uma quebra de linha sem iniciar um novo parágrafo (por exemplo depois de cada linha de endereço de uma mala direta), então tecle os quatro caracteres em sequência
<BR>onde voce gostaria de ter a quebra de linha.
Não use esta opção se voce ja tiver customizado seu web site, isso irá sobrescrever o arquivo "index.htm" no diretório do seu web site.
]]>Voce deseja continuar?
]]>Voce pode modificar, deixar inativa ou remover qualquer conta de usuário ou resetar as senhas das contas clicando no correspondente comando proximo a conta.
Se a conta está marcada como inativa, isso significa que a senha do usuário precisa ser resetada. Favor notar que ao criar uma conta ela é configurada como inativa até que a senha seja trocada.
]]>Note que dois pseudônimos são criados para cada nova conta. Esses pseudônimos habilitam o usuário a ter contar de correio alternativas que incluem seus primeiro e último nomes separados por um ponto (.) e uma barra inferior (_). Assim, para a conta "betty" com primeiro nome "Betty" e último nome "Rubble" dois psedônimos são criados, betty.rubble e betty_rubble.
O diretório de informação (departamento, copanhia, etc.) podem ser trocados do padrão como mostrado abaixo. As trocas irão ser aplicadas somente para este usuário.
]]>Voce tem certeza que deseja tornar essa conta inativa? ]]>
Voce tem certeza que deseja remover essa conta? ]]>
Tipo de relatório inválido "{$filename}".
]]>Este sistema está atualizado.
Todas atualizações foram instaladas. Parabéns. ]]>Atualizações Disponíveis
Existem atualizações disponíveis para seu sistema. Essas atualizações devem ser instaladas o mais breve possível. ]]>Se não se lembrar da sua palavra-passe antiga, deverá contactar o seu administrador de sistemas que poderá alterar a sua palavra-passe através do Gestor de Sistema.
]]>O primeiro método cria uma cópia da configuração de seu servidor e arquivos de dados dos usuários e permite o download deles para seu micro local via um navegador internet. Atualmente sua configuração e dados totalizam aproximadamente $tarsize. O arquivo de backup será algo menor que isso, dependendo de quão comprimível seus dados forem. A opção \"Verificar arquivo de backup para desktop\" pode ser usado para verificar a integridade de um arquivo de backup para o desktop.
O método de backup em fita usa um pacote de software chamado $module para fazer o backup de seu disco rígido inteiro para a fita todas as noites. Isto requer um drive de fita suportado e que a fita não esteja protegida contra gravação. O backup é feito automaticamente no horário selecionado a cada noite (com um lembrete sendo enviado automaticamente por e-mail ao administrador durante o dia). Atualmente seu disco rígido contém $dumpsize de dados.
Todos métodos de restauração permitem que você restaure sua configuração e arquivos de dados dos usuários. O método de backup para micro da rede local permite um restauração de arquivos individuais. Idealmente um backup completo deveria ser restaurado num servidor recém instalado.
]]>O primeiro método cria uma cópia da configuração de seu servidor e arquivos de dados dos usuários e permite o download deles para seu micro local via um navegador internet. Atualmente sua configuração e dados totalizam aproximadamente $tarsize. O arquivo de backup será algo menor que isso, dependendo de quão comprimível seus dados forem. Este arquivo pode ser usado para restaurar o servidor a partir da console se voce copiá-lo para uma mídia removível como um disco USB.
O método de backup em fita usa um pacote de software chamado $module para fazer o backup de seu disco rígido inteiro para a fita todas as noites. Isto requer um drive de fita suportado e que a fita não esteja protegida contra gravação. O backup é feito automaticamente no horário selecionado a cada noite (com um lembrete sendo enviado automaticamente por e-mail ao administrador durante o dia). Atualmente seu disco rígido contém $dumpsize de dados.
O método de backup para computador da rede usa um pacote de software chamado dar para fazer o backup da configuração de seu servidor e dos dados para um computador na rede local (ou um disco USB). Isto requer que você forneça um compartilhamento gravável (cifs ou nfs) no micro da rede local ou num disco USB. Você pode gerenciar quantos conjuntos de backup são mantidos no compartilhamento de backup e pode também definir um backup incremental por vários dias. O backup é realizado automaticamente no horário selecionado a cada noite. Atualmente sua configuração e arquivos de dados somam aproximadamente $tarsize (sem comprimir). No compartilhamento de backup deve estar disponível o DOBRO do espaço citado acima.
Todos métodos de restauração permitem que você restaure sua configuração e arquivos de dados dos usuários. O método de backup para micro da rede local permite uma restauração de arquivos individuais. Idealmente um restore completo deveria ser realizado num servidor recém instalado.
]]>O backup para fita requer um drive compatível. Uma mensagem de aviso será enviada para o administrador no tempo desejado se o drive de fita estiver vazio.
]]>Certifique-se de ter inserido o tape desejado no tape drive antes de proceder a restauração.
Depois da completada a restauração você tem que reinicializar o servidor.
]]>Somente arquivos marcados com [Saved] estão contidos no backup.
Arquivos de backup são verificados a partir do compartilhamento: ]]>
Assegure-se de escolher o backup correto antes de continuar o procedimento de restauração.
Depois da terminada a restauração você PRECISA reinicializar o servidor.
O backup será restaurado de: ]]>A próxima tela mostrará todos arquivos e diretórios disponíveis para que você escolha aqueles que deseja restaurar. Para diminuir o número de arquivos e diretórios mostrados nesta tela, você poderá inserir agora uma expressão de filtragem, aplicada como expressão regular aos nomes mostrados.
É sua a responsabilidade de não restaurar arquivos que poderiam fazer o servidor parar de funcionar.
Os arquivos serão restaurados de : ]]>
Tem certeza que deseja remover este domínio?
]]>Configuração de DNS corporativo
]]>Delegação de servidor de correio
Seu servidor inclui um servidor de correio eletrônico completo. Entretanto, se por alguma razão voce desejar delegar o processamento de correio para outro sistema, especifique o endereço IP do sistema desejado aqui. Para operações normais deixe este campo em branco. ]]>Configuração ETRN ou multi-drop
Para ETRN ou multi-drop, especifique o nome do host ou endereço IP de seu servidor secundário de correio. (Numa configuração padrão, este campo pode ficar em branco.) ]]>Servidor SMTP
O servidor pode enviar mensagens diretamente para seu destino (recomendado na maioria dos casos) ou pode enviá-las via servidor SMTP de seu provedor internet (recomendado se voce possui uma conexão não-confiável ou está usando internet residencial). Se estiver usando o servidor SMTP de seu provedor de Internet, especifique o hostname ou endereço IP abaixo. Caso contrário deixe esses campos em branco. ]]>Recepção de e-mail
]]>Entrega de e-mail
]]>Você tem certeza que deseja remover este nome de host? ]]>
Você pode remover qualquer pasta ou resetar a senha clicando no comando correspondente próximo ao compartilhamento. Se o compartilhamento estiver em vermelho, isto significa que a senha ainda não foi definida, e deverá ser trocada tão logo possível.
]]>Todos os arquivos pertencentes a esta pasta serão apagados.
Você tem certeza que deseja remover esta pasta?
]]>- {$vhostList}
O Servidor SME é livremente distribuido sobre a GNU (General Public License) o que somente é possível através dos esforços da comunidade do Servidor SME. Contudo, a disponibilidade e a qualidade do Servidor SME depende de podermos pagar nossas despesas com custos de hospedagem, custo de hardware e outros.
Para tal, lhe pedimos uma pequena doação para diminuir estes custos e ajudar a pagar desenvolvimentos futuros.
Por favor visite http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ para fazer uma doação.
Este software vem sem NENHUMA GARANTIA. Por favor clique aqui para ver informações detalhadas sobre suporte, garantia e licenciamento.
Para realizar uma função administrativa, clique em um dos links no menu na esquerda desta tela.
]]>Clique aqui para uma lista de funções de administração do sistema.
]]>Adicionar rede ]]>
"Roteador" deverá ser o endereço IP do roteador de sua rede local pelo qual a rede adicional será alcançada. ]]>
Seu servidor irá garantir privilegios de acesso local para {$totalHosts} endereços IP na faixa de {$firstAddr} à {$lastAddr}.
Aviso: o servidor FTP ProFTP não pode manusear essas máscaras de rede não -padrão. A especificação simples {$simpleMask} será usada.
]]>AVISO: O mau uso deste recurso pode comprometer seriamente a segurança de sua rede. Não use esse recurso levianamente ou sem uma compreensão profunda das implicações de suas ações.
]]>O nome da impressora somente deve conter letras minúsculas e números e deve iniciar com letra minúscula. Por exemplo "hplaser", "epsonlp", e "canonbj" são nomes válidos.
]]>Isso permite você criar outros nomes para um usuário ou grupo de usuários existente. Por exemplo, você pode querer criar um pseudônimo "webmaster" para seu grupo "webdevelopers" ou o pseudônimo "ze" para o usuário "jose".
O servidor criará automaticamente pseudônimos no formato primeironome.últimonome e primeironome_últimonome para cada usuário do sistema e um pseudônimo "everyone" para todos os usuários do sistema.
Pseudônimos também permitem que você crie apelidos de e-mail para usuários e domínios (virtuais) válidos de e-mail. Por exemplo, você pode encaminhar o e-mail "vendas@dominiovirtual1.com.br" para o usuário "joao" e o e-mail "vendas@dominiovirtual2.com.br" para o usuário "pedro". Porém lembre-se de que deve criar os domínios (virtuais) e as contas de usuário antes de criar os apelidos de e-mail.Você pode modificar ou remover um pseudônimo clicando no comando correspondente próximo ao pseudônimo.
]]>Por favor note que para geração de alguns destes relatórios podem ser necessários vários minutos
]]>Se o usuário exceder ao "limite com período de carência", avisos serão gerados. Se este limite for excedido por mais de uma semana ou se o "Limite absoluto" for alcançado, o usuário não poderá mais salvar arquivos ou receber mensagens.
Configurar para '0' qualquer destes limites desabilita o controle de cota para o usuário correspondente.
O espaço em disco para cada usuário inclui o diretório particular (home), mensagem e os arquivos pertencentes ao usuário nos compartilhamentos. ]]>
Configuração de shell segura
Você pode controlar acesso ao Shell Seguro para seu servidor. A configuração pública deve somente ser habilitada por administradores experientes para resolução e diagnóstico de problemas. Nós recomendamos deixar este parâmetro configurado para "Sem Acesso" a não ser que você tenha uma razão específica para fazer o contrário. ]]>Configurar FTP
Você também pode controlar o acesso FTP para o seu servidor. Nós recomendamos deixar esse parâmetro configurado para 'sem acesso' a não ser que você tenha uma razão específica para fazer o contrário.Nota: essas configurações limitam o acesso ao servidor e sobrepõem-se outras configurações, incluindo aquelas para compartilhamentos individuais.
]]>Configurar PPTP
Você pode habilitar acesso PPTP ao seu servidor. Você dev eria deixar esta configuração desabilitada entrando o número 0 (zero) a não ser que precise de acesso PPPT. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
É possível permitir que hosts em uma rede remota acessem o gerenciador do servidor entrando essas redes aqui. Use uma máscara de subrede de 255.255.255.255 para limitar o acesso a um determinado host. Qualquer host dentro da faixa especificada estará habilitado a acessar o gerenciador do servidor usando HTTPS.
]]>Console serial
Você pode permitir o acesso ao console do servidor de um terminal conectado a porta serial.]]>Configuração telnet
AVISO: Telnet está atualmente habilitado, mas esta opção não é mais suportada. Telnet é inerentemente inseguro e somente deve ser usado numa circunstância onde uma prática alternativa não exista. Você deve trocar essa opção para {$NO_ACCESS} e usar shell segura se acesso remoto for necessário. Uma vez desabilitada, telnet não mais aparecerá nessa tela. ]]>Você pode deixar qualquer campo em branco se você não precisar dele.
O texto que você entrar abaixo será alinhado e formatado para uma melhor aparência em sua página web. Deixe uma linha em branco quando desejar iniciar um novo parágrafo. Se você precisar forçar uma quebra de linha sem iniciar um novo parágrafo (por exemplo depois de cada linha de endereço de uma mala direta), então tecle os quatro caracteres em sequência
<BR>onde você gostaria de ter a quebra de linha.
Não use esta opção se você já tiver customizado seu web site pois esta tela sobrescreverá o arquivo "index.htm" no diretório do seu web site.
]]>Você deseja continuar?
]]>Você pode modificar, bloquear ou remover qualquer conta de usuário ou resetar as senhas das contas clicando no comando correspondente próximo a conta.
Se a conta está marcada como bloqueada, isso significa que a senha do usuário precisa ser resetada. Por favor note que ao criar uma conta ela é configurada como bloqueada até que a senha seja definida.
]]>Note que dois pseudônimos são criados para cada nova conta. Esses pseudônimos habilitam o usuário a ter contas de correio alternativas que incluem seus primeiro e último nomes separados por um ponto (.) e sublinhado (_). Assim, para a conta "beto" com primeiro nome "Roberto" e último nome "Silva" dois psedônimos são criados, roberto.silva e roberto_silva.
As informações do diretório (departamento, companhia, etc.) podem ser trocados para outras além das padrão definidas abaixo. As alterações serão aplicadas somente para este usuário.
]]>Você tem certeza que deseja tornar bloquear essa conta? ]]>
Você tem certeza que deseja remover essa conta? ]]>
Tipo de relatório inválido "{$filename}".
]]>Este sistema está atualizado.
Todas atualizações foram instaladas. Parabéns. ]]>Atualizações Disponíveis
Existem atualizações disponíveis para seu sistema. Essas atualizações devem ser instaladas o mais breve possível. ]]>Se você não pode trocar sua senha porque esqueceu a antiga, seu administrador do servidor poderá resetar sua senha usando o gerenciador do servidor.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Salvarea pe bandă necesită un magneto inregisterator de bandă.. Un mesaj de alarmă va fi trimis administratorului la ora programată dacă lipsește banda.
]]>Asigurațivă că ați încărcat banda adecvată in dispozitivul de bandă înainte de a continua.
După restaurarea completă va trebui să reporniți serverul.
]]>Only files flagged with [Saved] are contained in the backup.
Backup files are verified from shared folder : ]]>
Ensure that choose the right backup to restore below before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
Backup will be restored from : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Add domain ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this domain?
]]>Corporate DNS Settings
]]>Delegate mail servers
Your server includes a complete, full-featured e-mail server. However, if for some reason you wish to delegate e-mail processing to another system, specify the IP address of the delegate system here. For normal operation, leave this field blank. ]]>ETRN or multi-drop settings
For ETRN or multi-drop, specify the hostname or IP address of your secondary mail server. (If using the standard e-mail setup, this field can be left blank.) ]]>SMTP server
The server can deliver outgoing messages directly to their destination (recommended in most cases) or can deliver them via your Internet provider's SMTP server (recommended if you have an unreliable Internet connection or are using a residential Internet service). If using your Internet provider's SMTP server, specify its hostname or IP address below. Otherwise leave this field blank. ]]>E-mail reception
]]>E-mail delivery
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
You can remove any information bay or reset its password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the information bay. If the information bay shows up in red, that means that the password has not yet been changed from the default, and should be changed soon.
]]>All files belonging to this information bay will be deleted.
Are you sure you wish to remove this information bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server este liber distribuit sub licenta GNU General Public License și a fost posibil doar datorită comunității SME Server. Oricum, disponibilitatea și calitatea SME Server este dependenta de acoperirea cheltuielilor, cum ar fi costurile de mentenata servere, acces internet, hardwre, etc.
Astfel, vă rugăm să considerați donații pentru a suporta mentenata și dezvoltarea ulterioară.
Vă rugăm vizitați http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ pentru donații.
Acest software vine FARA NICI O GARANȚIE. Apăsați aici pentru a vedea detaliile de suport, garanție și licentțiere.
Pentru a utiliza o functie de administrare apăsați unul din linkurile din meniul din stânga ecranului.
]]>Apăsați aici pentru o listă a funțiilor de administrare.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>Suport și licențiere
Acest software se supune termenilor de la pagina Support and Licensing . ]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>The printer name should contain only lower-case letters and numbers, and should start with a lower-case letter. For example "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" are valid names.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>Țineți cont că se poate ca genrarea acestor rapoarte să dureze câteva minute
]]>Dacă utilizatorul depășeste "Limita cu perioadă de grație", un avertisment va fi generat. Dacă limita este incălcată pentru o perioadă mai mare de o săptamână sau dacă se atinge "Limita absolută", utilizatorul nu va mai putea salva alte fișiere sau să primeasca alte emailuri.
Setarea '0' pentru ambele limite dezactiveaza limitele utilizatorului.
Spațiul utilizat de utilizator include directorul home al lui, emailurile și toate fișierele deținute în ibay-uri.. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>PPTP Settings
You can allow PPTP access to your server. You should leave this feature disabled by setting the value to the number 0 unless you require PPTP access. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
It is possible to allow hosts on remote networks to access the server manager by entering those networks here. Use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 to limit the access to the specified host. Any hosts within the specified range will be able to access the server manager using HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
You can allow access to the server console from a terminal connected to a server serial port.]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>Puteți lăsa orice câmp necompletat daca nu aveți nevoie de el.
Textul pe care îl completați va fi aranjat pentru o mai plăcută pe pagina dumneavoastră de Web. Lăsați un rând liber pentru orice paragraf nou pe care îl doriți . Dacă doriți sa scrieți pe alt rând fără a deschide un paragraf nou (de ex după fiecare line ce conține o adresă de mail), atunci scrieți secventa de caractere
<BR>Unde aveți nevoie de rând nou.
Nu utilizați această opțiune dacă deja ați actualizat agina dumneavoastra de Internet, deoarece această opțiune va suprascrie fișierul "index.htm" din directorul de bază al paginii.
]]>Vreți să contiunăm?
]]>You can modify, lock or remove any account or reset the account's password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the account.
If the account is marked as locked, that means that the user's password needs to be reset. Please note that newly created accounts are automatically locked until the password is changed.
]]>Note that two special pseudonyms will be created for each new account. These pseudonyms provide the ability to have alternative mail accounts for that user which include their first name and last name separated with a period (.) and underscore (_). So, for the account "betty" with first name "Betty" and last name "Rubble" two pseudonyms are created as betty.rubble and betty_rubble.
The directory information (department, company, etc.) can be changed from the defaults shown below. The changes will apply only to this user.
]]>Are you sure you wish to lock this account? ]]>
Are you sure you wish to remove this account? ]]>
Tip de raport invalid "{$filename}".
]]>Sistemul este actualizat.
Aveți toate actualizările la zi. ]]>Acest sistem este actualizat.
Toate actualizările au fost instalate. ]]>Dacă nu vă puteți schimba parola deoarece v-ați uitat vechea parolă, administratorul sistemului dumneavoastră v-o poate reseta utilizând server manager.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>The tape backup requires a supported tape drive. A warning message will be sent to the administrator at the designated reminder time if the tape drive is empty.
]]>Ensure that you have loaded the desired backup tape into the tape drive before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
]]>Only files flagged with [Saved] are contained in the backup.
Backup files are verified from shared folder : ]]>
Ensure that choose the right backup to restore below before proceeding.
After the restore completes you must reboot the server.
Backup will be restored from : ]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Добавить домен ]]>
Вы действительно хотите удалить этот домен?
]]>Параметры корпоративных DNS
]]>Выделенные почтовые серверы
Ваш сервер включает полнофункциональный почтовый сервер. Однако, в некоторых случаях вам может потребоваться передать обработку почты другой системе, укажите IP адрес выденной системы здесь. Для нормальной эксплуатации оставьте это поле пустым. ]]>Настройки ETRN или multi-drop
Для ETRN или multi-drop, укажите имя или IP адрес вашего вторичного почтового сервера. (Если используются стандартный способ получения, эти поля могут быть оставлены пустыми.) ]]>SMTP сервер
Сервер может доставлять исходящие сообщения напрямую (рекомендуется в большинстве случаев) или через SMTP-сервер Интернет-провайдера (рекомендуется, если ваше подключение к Интернету ненадежно или используется домашнее подключение). При использовании SMTP-сервера вашего Интернет-провайдера, укажите его имя или IP адрес ниже. В противном случае оставьте это поле пустым. ]]>Получение почты
]]>Доставка e-mail
]]>Вы действительно хотите удалить это имя хоста? ]]>
Вы можете удалить любой информационный блок или сбосить его пароль, нажав на соответствующую команду, рядом с информационным блоком. Если информационный блок выделен красным, это означает, что не был и должен быть изменён стандартный пароль.
]]>Все файлы принадлежащие этому информационному блоку будут удалены.
Вы действительно хотите удалить этот информационный блок ?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server свободно доступен под Стандартной общественной лицензией (GNU General Public License), что является возможным только благодаря усилиям сообщества SME Server. Тем не менее, доступность и качество SME Server зависит от наших расходов, таких, как оплата хостинга, серверное оборудование и т.д.
Таким образом, мы просим небольшое пожертвование для покрытия расходов и финансирования дальнейшей разработки.
Пожалуйста, посетите http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ для пожертвований.
Это программное обеспечение поставляется БЕЗ КАКИХ-ЛИБО ГАРАНТИЙ. Пожалуйста, нажмите здесь, чтобы увидеть подробную информацию о поддержке, гарантиях и лицензировании.
Для выполнения функций системного администрирования нажмите одну из ссылок в меню слева экрана.
]]>Нажмите здесь, чтобы получить список функций системного администрирования.
]]>Добавить сеть ]]>
"Маршрутизатор" должен быть IP адресом маршрутизатора в вашей локальной сети через который доступны дополнительные сети. ]]>
Ваш сервер предоставляет привилегии локального доступа {$totalHosts} IP адресам в диапазоне от {$firstAddr} до {$lastAddr}.
Внимание: ProFTPd FTP сервер не может обработать эту нестандартную маску подсети. Вместо неё будет использована упрощённое описание {$simpleMask}.
]]>Поддержка и лицензирование
Это программное обеспечение выпущено на условиях указанных на странице Поддержка и лицензирование. ]]>ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ: Неправильное использование этой функции может серьезно подорвать безопасность вашей сети. Не используйте эту функцию необдуманно и без полного понимания последствий ваших действий.
]]>Имя принтера должно содержать только строчные буквы и цифры, и должно начинаться с буквы в нижнем регистре. Например, "hplaser", "epsonlp" и "canonbj" допустимые имена.
]]>Псевдонимы позволяют создавать другие имена для существующих пользователей или групп . Например, вы можете создать псевдоним "webmaster" для группы "webdevelopers" или псевдоним "joe" для пользователя "joseph".
Сервер автоматически создает псевдоним в виде имя.фамилия и имя_фамилия для каждого пользователя в системе и псевдоним "everyone", который содержит всех пользователей системы.
Псевдонимы также позволяют вам создать псевдонимы электронной почты действительных (виртуальных) доменов и пользователей. Например, вы можете перенаправить "sales@virtualdomain1.com" пользователю "mary" и "sales@virtualdomain2.com" пользователю "john". Вы должны создать домены и учетные записи пользователей, прежде чем создавать псевдонимы электронной почты.
Псевдоним можно также перенаправить на другие псевдонимы, но это ограничено только одним уровнем. Например, псевдоним "webmaster" может перенаправлять на псевдоним "techsupport", который затем пересылает на пользователя "ray". Это полезно, когда один пользователь отвечает за многочисленные функции и сохраняет необходимость изменить псевдонимы, связанные с этим пользователем не раз в том случае, если пользователь уходит из организации.
Вы можете изменить или удалить псевдоним, нажав на соответствующую команду рядом с псевдонимом.
]]>Имейте в виду, что может потребоваться несколько минут для создания этих отчётов
]]>Если пользователь превышает "Лимит с льготным периодом ", будет создано предупреждение. Если этот предел превышен более чем на неделю или, если "Абсолютный лимит" будет достигнут, то пользователь не сможет более сохранять любые файлы или получать какую-либо электронную почту.
Установка '0' для любого лимита отключает этот лимит для соответствующего пользователя.
Размер дискового пространства для каждого пользователя, включает в себя домашний каталог пользователя, электронную почту, а также любые файлы, принадлежащие пользователю в информационных разделах. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>Настройки PPTP
Вы можете разрешить PPTP доступ к вашему серверу. Вам следует оставить эту функцию отключённой, установив значение равным 0, пока вам не потребуется PPTP доступ.]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Возможно разрешить узлам удаленной сети доступ управлению сервером путем ввода этих сетей здесь. Используйте маску подсети 255.255.255.255, чтобы ограничить доступ указанным узлом. Любой узел, в пределах указанного диапазона будет иметь доступ к управлению сервером, используя HTTPS.
]]>Последовательная консоль
Вы можете разрешить доступ к консоли сервера с терминала подключённого к последовательному порту сервера.]]>Настройки Telnet
ВНИМАНИЕ: Telnet включён, но эта функция больше не поддерживается. Telnet является небезопасным и по своей сути должен быть использован только в тех случаях, когда нет практической альтернативы. Вы должны изменить параметр на {$NO_ACCESS} и использовать SSH, если требуется удаленный доступ. После отключения, Telnet больше не будет появляться на этом экране. ]]>Вы можете оставить любые поля пустыми, если они вам не нужны.
Строки текста, который вы введёте ниже, будут свёрнуты для лучшего отображения на вашей веб-странице. Оставьте пустую строку, если вы хотите начать новый абзац. Если вам нужно принудительно разорвать строки без начала нового абзаца (например, после каждой строки почтовых адресов), то введите четырехзначную последовательность
<BR>там, где вы хотели бы видеть разрыв строки.
Не используйте эту возможность если вы уже изменили ваш веб-сайт, так как это приведёт к перезаписи файла "index.htm" в корневом каталоге вашего веб-сайта.
]]>Вы хотите продолжить?
]]>Вы можете изменить, заблокировать или удалить учетную запись или сбросить её пароль, нажав на соответствующую команду рядом с учётной записью.
Если учетная запись помечена как заблокированнная, это означает, что пароль пользователя необходимо сбросить. Имейте в виду, что вновь созданные учётные записи будут автоматически заблокированы до тех пор, пока не изменен пароль.
]]>Заметим, что два специальных псевдонима будут созданы для каждой новой учетной записи. Эти псевдонимы предоставляют возможность иметь альтернативные учетные записи тем пользователям, которые используют имя и фамилию, разделенные точкой (.) и подчеркиванием (_). Так, для учётной записи "betty" с именем "Betty" и фамилией "Rubble" будут созданы два псевдонима, betty.rubble и betty_rubble.
Справочная информация (отдел, компания и т.д.) может быть изменена с умолчаний показаных ниже. Эти изменения будут применены только к этому пользователю.
]]>Вы уверены, что хотите заблокировать эту учётную запись? ]]>
Вы уверены, что хотите удалить эту учётную запись? ]]>
Неверный тип отчёта "{$filename}".
]]>Эта система обновлена.
Все обновления были установлены. ]]>Доступны обновления
Доступны обновления для вашей системы. Эти обновления должны быть установлены как можно скорее. ]]>Если вы не можете сменить ваш пароль, потому что забыли его, ваш системный администратор может сбросить ваш пароль используя менеджер сервера.
]]>The first method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how compressible the data are. The \"Verify desktop backup file\" option can be used to check the integrity of a desktop backup file.
The tape backup method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Both restore methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Ideally, the restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Zadnja datoteka v arhivu, bi morala biti datoteka z imenom "smbpasswd".
]]>Arhiviranje na trak zahteva podprto tracno enoto. Na administratorjev naslov bo poslano opozorilo, v kolikor bo tracna enota prazna.
]]>Zagotovite, da je v tracni enoti ustrezna arhivska kaseta, preden nadaljujete.
Po koncanem arhiviranju morate streznik ponovno zagnati.
]]>Zadnja datoteka v arhivu, bi morala biti datoteka z imenom "smbpasswd".
]]>Zagotovite, da je v tracni enoti ustrezna arhivska kaseta, preden nadaljujete.
Po koncanem arhiviranju morate streznik ponovno zagnati.
]]>The next panel will display available files and directories, so you can choose the ones to restore. To restrict the number of files and directories displayed in this panel, you have the option to give now a filtering expression, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
You have the responsibility not to restore files which could break the functioning of your server.
Currently, files will be restored from : ]]>
Dodaj domeno ]]>
Ste prepricani, da zelite odstraniti to domeno?
]]>Splosne DNS nastavitve streznika
]]>Privzeti mail streznik
Vas streznik vsebuje kompleten, e-mail streznik z vsemi funkcijami, vendar ce bi vseeno iz katerega koli razloga zeleli procesiranje e-poste preusmeriti na drugi streznik, navedite tukaj IP naslov privzetega mail streznika. za normalno uporabo pustite to polje prazno. ]]>ETRN ali multi-drop nastavitve
Za ETRN ali multi-drop, morate navesti ime streznika ali njegov IP naslov. (Ce uporabljate standardne e-mail nastavitve, lahko to polje ostane prazno.) ]]>Sprejemanje E-mail(a)
]]>Dostava E-mail(a)
]]>Ste prepricani, da zelite odstraniti to ime racunalnika? ]]>
Odstranite lahko vsak informacijski list ali ponastaavite njegovo geslo s klikom na ustrezno povezavo ukaza zraven imena informacijskega lista. Ce je ime informacijskega lista izpisano rdece pomeni, da se niste zamenjali gesla s privzete vrednosti in bi ga bilo smiselno zamenjati cim prej.
]]>Vse datoteke v tem informacijskem listu bodo izbrisane.
Ali ste prepricani, da zelite odstraniti ta informacijski list?
]]>- {$vhostList}
Za upravljanje in vzdrzevanje streznika kliknite na zeljeno povezavo v meniju na levi strani vasega zaslona.
]]>Sledite povezavi, da boste dobili seznam skrbniskih opravil.
]]>Dodaj omrezje ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>OPOZORILO: Napacna uporaba te lastnosti lahko resno ogrozi varnost vasega omrezja. Ne uporabljajte te funkcije, ce niste popolnoma prepricani v to kar spreminjate in se zavedate posledic vasega dejanja.
]]>Ime tiskalnika lahko vsebuje samo male crke in stevilke naprimer "hplaser" ali "canonbj" in se mora zaceti z malo crko.
]]>Vzdevek ti omogoca dodati imena za obstojece uporabnike ali skupine. Primer: Zelis kreirati vzdevek "primer" za skupino "primerskupina" ali vzdevek "test" za uporabnika "testiranec".
Streznik avtomatsko generira vzdevek po vzorcu ime.priimek in ime_priimek za vsakega uporabnika in vzdevek "everyone" ki vsebuje vse uporabnike v sistemu
Za urejanje ali brisanje vzdevka pritisni na ustrezni napis poleg vzdevka.
]]>Prosim bodi pozoren, ker lahko generiranje porocila traja kar nekaj casa.
]]>Ce uporabnik prekoraci "Limit pred maximumom", bo generirano opozorilo. Ce je limit presezen za dlje kot teden dni ali ce je dosezen "Maximalni limit" potem uporabnik ne bo mogel vec shranjevati datotek in prejemati e-poste.
Nastavitev "0" pri obeh onemogoci limit za izbranega uporabnika.
Prostor na disku zajema uporabniski domaci direktorij, e-postni predal in vse datoteke, ki so v uporabnikovi lasti (tudi vsebina informacijskih listov). ]]>
Varnostne nastavitve lupine Shell
Tu lahko nastavis Varnostne Nastavitve Lupine Shell za dostop do streznika. Javni dostop naj bi bil izbran samo za zelo izkusene Administratorje za resevanje tezav na daljavo. Priporocam ti, da pustis to opcijo nastavljeno na "ni dostopa", razen ce imas tehten razlog za spremembo. ]]>FTP Nastavitve
Nastavis lahko tudi FTP dostop do streznika. Predlagam ti, da pustis ta parameter nastavljen na "Ni dostopa" razen ce imas tehten razlog, da to spremenis.Pozor: Ta nastavitev omeji dostop do streznika in prepise vse nastavitve vkljucno z individualnimi v information bays.
]]>PPTP Nastavitve
Tu lahko omogocis PPTP dostop do streznika. To opcijo pusti onemogoceno z vneseno stevilko "0" razen, ce potrbujes PPTP dostop. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Tu je mozno dolociti oddaljeno omrezje za dostop do Upravljalca Streznika (server-manager). Uporabi masko podomrezja 255.255.255.255, da omogocis dostop samo izbranemu gostitelju (host-u). Vsak gostitelj v izbranem obmocju bo imel dostop do Upravljalca Streznika preko HTTPS povezave..
]]>Serijska konzola
Tu lahko omogocis dostop do Konzole Streznika preko terminala, ki je prikljucen preko serijskega porta na strezniku..]]>Telnet nastavitve
POZOR: Telnet dostop je trenutno omogocen. Toda ta opcija ni vec podprta. Telnet je izredno brez varnosti in naj bo uporabljen samo takrat, ko ni popolnoma nobene druge moznosti. Moral bi spremeniti v {$NO_ACCESS} in uporabiti Varen Dostop, ce potrebujes oddaljen dostop. Ko bo Telnet enkrat onemogocen se na ekranu ne bo vec pojavil ]]>Polja, ki jih ne potrebujes lahko pustis prazna.
Tekst, ki ga bos vnesel spodaj bo zavito za boljsi izgled spletne strani.
<BR>
Te funkcije ne uporabljaj ce si ze kreiral osnovno spletno stran ce si ze kreiral osnovno spletno stran, ker bos prepisal "index.htm" datoteko v domacem web direktoriju.
]]>Ali zelis nadaljevati?
]]>Tu lahko popravis, zaklenes ali odstranis uporabnika in pa resetiras geslo uporabnika s pritiskom na gumb poleg imena uporabnika.
Ce je uporabnik oznacen kot zaklenjen, pomeni da je potrebno geslo uporabnika resetirati. Prosim, bodi pozoren ker je pri novih uporabnikih racun zaklenjen avtomatsko, dokler se ne vnese geslo.
]]>Pozor. Za vsak nov racun bosta kreirana dva vzdevka-naziva. Torej za racun "glavni" z imenom "marjan" in priimkom "taglavni" bosta kreirana vzdevka locena z piko (.) in podcrtajem (_) : "marjan.taglavni" in "marjan_taglavni" .
Uporbniski podatki (oddelek, podjetje, itd) se lahko popravijo iz osnovnih na podatke prikazane spodaj. Spremembe bodo vplivale samo na ta racun.
]]>Ali si preprican, da zelis zakleniti ta racun? ]]>
Ali si preprican, da zelis izbrisati ta racun? ]]>
Napacen tip porocila "{$filename}".
]]>This system is up to date.
All updates have been installed. ]]>Na voljo so nove posodobitve
Za vas sistem so na voljo nove posodobitve. Prirocamo vam, jih namestite cim prej. ]]>Ce ste vase staro geslo pozabili in zaradi tega ne morete zamenjati gesla, vam lahko geslo ponastavi vas skrbnik streznika z uporabo spletne nadzorne plosce.
]]>Den första metoden skapar en kopia av din server konfiguration och användarnas datafiler, laddar ner det till din lokala klient via din webbläsare. För närvarande upptar din konfigurations- och datafiler totalt ungefär $tarsize. Backup-filen kommer att bli något mindre än detta, beroende på hur komprimerad datat är. \"Verifiering av klientens backupfile\" inställning kan användas för att kontrollera integriteten på backupfilen.
Backup med bandstation använder en mjukvara med namnet $module för att ta backup på hela hårddisken till band, varje natt. Detta kräver en bandstation som stöds och ett band som inte är skrivskyddat. Backupen körs automatiskt på vald tid varje natt (med en påminnelse som automatiskt e-postas till administratören under dagen). För närvarande innehåller din hårddisk $dumpsize av data.
Båda återställningsmetoderna tillåter dig att återställa din konfiguration och användarnas datafiler. Idealiskt är att återställningen sker på en nyinstallerad server.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Bandbackupen kräver ett bandstation som stöds. Ett varningsmeddelande kommer att skickas till administratören på den angivna påminnelsetiden om bandstationen inte har något band.
]]>Försäkra dig om att du har laddad det önskade bandet i bandstationen innan du fortsätter.
Efter det att återställningen är klar måste du starta om servern.
]]>Endast filer markerade med [Sparad] finns i backupen.
Backupfilerna verifieras från den delade mappen : ]]>
Försäkra dig om att du har valt den önskade backupen innan du fortsätter.
Efter det att återställningen är klar måste du starta om servern.
Backupen kommer att återställas från : ]]>Nästa fönster kommer att visa tillgängliga filer och mappar och du kan därefter välja de som du vill återställa. För att minska antalet filer och mappar som visas i nästa fönster kan du nu ange ett filter, som anges som ett vanligt uttryck till de visade namnen.
Det är ditt ansvar så att du inte återställer några filer som förhindrar funktionen på din server.
Filerna återställs från: ]]>
Lägg till domän ]]>
Är du säker på att du vill ta bort denna domän?
]]>Företagets DNS-inställningar
]]>Delegering av mailserver
Din server innehåller en komplett, fullfjädrad mailserver. Om du av någon orsak vill delegera e-posthanteringen till ett annan server , specificera IP-adressen på detta system här. För normalt användande, lämna detta fält tomt. ]]>ETRN eller multi-drop-inställningar
För ETRN eller multi-drop, specificera värdnamnet eller IP-adress för din sekundära mailserver. (Om du använder standardinställningarna för e-post, kan detta fält lämnas tomt.) ]]>SMTP server
Servern kan leverera utgående meddelanden direkt till deras destination (rekommenderas i de flesta fall) eller så kan de skickas via din Internetleverantörs SMTP-server (rekommenderas om du har en instabil Internetförbindelse eller använder en bostadsrättsförenings Internettjänst). Om du använder dig av din Internetleverantörs SMTP-server, ange dess värdnamn eller IP-adress nedan, annars lämna detta fält tomt. ]]>E-postmottagning
]]>E-postleverans
]]>Är du säker på att du vill radera detta värdnamn? ]]>
Du kan radera vilken information bay som helst eller återställa dess lösenord genom att klicka på tillhörande kommando vid sidan om information bay. Om information bay visas i rött betyder detta att lösenordet inte har ändrats från förvalda. Lösenordet måste bytas snarast.
]]>Alla filer som tillhör denna information bay kommer att raderas.
Är du säker på att du vill radera denna information bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server är fritt tillgänglig under GNU General Public License och är endast möjlig genom ansträngningar av SME Server community. Emellertid så är tillgängligheten och kvalitén på SME Server beroende av uppfyllnad av våra kostnader som exempelvis, hyra, serverhårdvara, etc.
Vi önskar oss därför en gåva för att täcka kostnaderna samt för kommande utveckling.
Besök http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ för att ge en gåva.
Denna mjukvara kommer med ABSOLUT INGEN GARANTI. Klicka här för att se detaljerad information om support, garanti och licensvillkor.
För att genomföra en administrativ åtgärd på systemet, klicka på en av länkarna i menyn till vänster.
]]>Klicka här för en lista över administratörsfunktioner.
]]>"Router" skall vara den IP-adress på ditt lokala nätverk som det ytterligare nätverket nås via. ]]>
Din server tillåter lokala åtkomstprivilegier till {$totalHosts} IP-adresser inom intervallet {$firstAddr} till {$lastAddr}.
Varning: ProFTPd FTP-server kan inte hantera denna icke standardiserade nätverksmask. Den enklare specifikationen {$simpleMask} kommer att användas istället.
]]>Hjälp och licensiering
Denna mjukvara är släppt under de villkor som visas på hjälp och licensierings sidan. ]]>Varning: Felaktig användning av denna inställning kan allvarligt hota säkerheten på ditt nätverk. Använd inte denna möjlighet lättvindligt eller utan att du förstår innebörden av dina åtgärder.
]]>Skrivarnamnet för endast innehålla gemener och siffror och måste börja med en gemen. Exempelvis "hplaser", "epsonlp" eller "canonbj" är godkända namn.
]]>Pseudonymer ger dig möjligheten att skapa andra namn för existerande grupp eller grupper. Exempelvis, du kanske önskar att skapa pseudonymen "webbmaster" för din "webdevelopers-grupp" eller en pseudonym "joe" för användaren "joseph".
Servern skapar automatiskt pseudonymer i formen av förnamn.efternamn och förnamn_efternamn för varje användare på systemet samt en pseudonym "everyone" som innehåller alla användare på systemet.
Pseudonymer tillåter dig att skapa e-postalias för tillåtna (virtuella) domäner och användare. Exempelvis kan du vidarebefordra "sales@virtualdomain1.com" till användaren "mary" och "sales@virtualdomain2.com" till användaren "john". Du måste skapa domän och användarkonto innan du skapar e-postalias.
Pseudonymer kan också vidarebefordra till andra pseudonymer även om detta är begränsat till ytterligare en nivå. Exempelvis kan pseudonymen "webmaster" vidarebefordra till pseudonymen "techsupport" som därefter vidarebefordrar till den angivna användaren "ray". Detta är användbart när en användare är ansvarig för multipla roller och sparar arbete med att ändra pseudonymens association med speciell användare flera gånger om användaren lämnar organisationen.
Du kan ändra eller ta bort en pseudonym genom att klicka på aktuellt kommando bredvid pseudonymen.
]]>Notera dock att det kan ta flera minuter att skapa en rapport
]]>Om användaren överskrider "gränsen för anståndsperioden", kommer varning att generas. Om denna gräns överskrids med mer än en vecka eller om den "Absoluta gränsen" nås, kommer användaren ej att kunna spara med filer eller erhålla fler e-postmeddelanden.
Inställningen '0' för någon av gränserna, tar bort just den gränsen för aktuell användare.
Diskutrymmet för varje användare inkluderar användarens hem-mapp, e-post och alla filer som användaren äger i information bays. ]]>
Inställningar för säkert skal
Du kan kontrollera åtkomsten via säkert skal till din server. Den publika inställningen bör endast tillåtas av erfarna administratörer för fjärrdiagnostik och för problemlösning. Vi rekommenderar att låta denna inställning vara "Ingen åtkomst" om du inte har ett speciellt skäl att göra annorlunda. ]]>FTP-inställningar
Du kan också kontrollera FTP-åtkomsten till din server. Vi rekommenderar att du låter denna inställning vara 'ingen åtkomst' om du inte har speciella skäl att göra annorlunda.OBS: Dessa inställningar begränsar åtkomsten till servern och överrider andra inställningar, inklusive dem för information bays.
]]>PPTP inställningar
Du kan tillåta PPTP åtkomst till din server. Du bör ange denna inställning till Ej tillåten genom att ange värdet till 0 såvida du inte behöver PPTP åtkomst. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Det är möjligt att tillåta värdar på fjärrnätverk att komma åt serverhanteraren genom att ange de specifika nätverken här. Använd en subnätmask av formen 255.255.255.255 för att begränsa åtkomsten för en specik värd. Alla värdar inom det angivna intervallet kommer att få åtkomst till serverhanteraren genom att använda HTTPS.
]]>Seriell konsol
Du kan tillåta åtkomst till serverkonsolen från en terminal ansluten till serverns serieport.]]>Telnet-inställningar
Varning: Telnet är för tillfället tillåten, med denna möjlighet stöds inte längre. Telnet är osäker och skall endast användas i de fall då inga andra pratiska alternativ finns. Du bör ändra valet till {$NO_ACCESS} och använda säkert skal om fjärråtkomst krävs. När den inte längre är tillåten, kommer telnet inte att synas på denna skärm. ]]>Du kan lämna vilket fält som helst tomt om du inte vill ange någon information.
Texten som du anger nedan kommer att sättas ihop radvis för ett trevliga utseende på din webbsida. Lämna en tom rad när du vill starta ett nytt stycke. Om du behöver framtvinga en radbrytning utan att starta en nytt stycke (exempelvis efter varje rad med en e-postadress), skriv de fyra tecknen
<BR>varje gång du önskar en radbrytning.
Använd inte denna möjlighet om du redan har skapat en egen webbsida, eftersom detta kommer att skriva över "index.htm"-filen i din webbsidas mapp.
]]>Vill du fortsätta?
]]>Du kan ändra, låsa eller radera konto eller återställa kontots lösenord genom att klicka på länken vid sidan om aktuellt konto.
Om kontot är markerat låst betyder det att användarens lösenord behöver återställas. Observera att nyligen skapade konton automatiskt blir låsta tills lösenordet ändras.
]]>Observera att två pseudonymer kommer att skapas för varje nytt konto. Dessa två synonymer möjliggör att ha alternativa e-postkonton för varje användare som innehåller förnamn och efternamn separerade med en punkt (.) respektive understreck (_). För exempelvis kontot "betty" med förnamnet "Betty" och efternamnet "Rubble" kommer två pseudonymer att skapas betty.rubble och betty_rubble.
Kataloginformationen (avdelning, företag, etc.) kan ändras från det förvalda, som visas nedan. Ändringarna kommer bara att påverka aktuell användare.
]]>Är du säker på att du vill låsa detta användarkonto? ]]>
Är du säker på att du vill radera detta konto? ]]>
Ogiltig rapporttyp "{$filename}".
]]>Detta system är uppdaterat.
Alla uppdateringar har installerats. ]]>Uppdateringar finns tillgängliga
Det finns uppdateringar tillgängliga för ditt system. Dessa uppdateringar bör installeras så fort som möjligt. ]]>Om du inte kan ändra ditt lösenord med anledning av att du har glömt det gamla, kan din lokala systemadminstratör återställa lösenordet genom serverhanteraren.
]]>ในวิธีแรกจะทำสำเนาการตั้งค่าของเซอร์ฟเวอร์และข้อมูลของผู้ใช้ จากนั้นดาวน์โหลดลงมาที่เดสก์ทอปของคุณ ซึ่งจะทำผ่านเว็บเบราเซอร์ ปัจจุบันขนาดรวมของไฟล์การตั้งค่าของเซอร์ฟเวอร์และข้อมูลของผู้ใช้มีอยู่ประมาณ $tarsize โดยทั่วไปไฟล์แบคอัพจริงจะเล็กกว่านี้ ซึ่งขึ้นกับข้อมูลจะสามารถถูกบีบอัดลงได้มากแค่ใหน ตัวเลือก \"ตรวจทานไฟล์ของการสำรองไปเดสก์ทอป\" จะใช้เมื่อต้องหากการให้ทำการตรวจสอบความถูกต้องของไฟล์สำรองนั้นด้วย
การสำรองโดยใช้เทปแบคอัพจะใช้ชุดโปรแกรมที่ชื่อ $module โดยจะทำการสำรองข้อมูลทั้งหมดทั้งฮาร์ดไดร์ลงเทป และทำทุกวัน (ทุกคืน) มันทำงานได้เฉพาะกับเครื่องเล่นเทปที่มันรู้จักและเทปต้องป้องกัน มันจะทำงานโดยอัตโนมัติเมื่อถึงเวลาที่ตั้งไว้ (รวมถึงทำการเตือนล่วงหน้าให้ใส่เทป โดยจะอีเมล์ไปที่ผู้ดูแลระบบของเซอร์ฟเวอร์นี้) ขณะนี้ฮาร์ดดิสมีข้อมูลทั้งหมดขนาดประมาณ $dumpsize
วิธีการทั้งสองแบบต่างก็สามารถเรียกคืนข้อมูลสำรองไว้ได้ คำแนะนำ การเรียกคืนข้อมูลสำรองนี้ควรทำเฉพาะกับเซอร์ฟเวอร์ที่ติดตั้งโปรแกรมใหม่
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>ไฟล์สุดท้ายที่อยู่ในแฟ้มนั้นๆ ควรเป็นไฟล์ชื่อ "smbpasswd"
]]>คุณต้องมีเครื่องบันทึกเทปสำรองข้อมูลที่ระบบรู้จัก และข้อความแจ้งเตือนจะถูกส่งไปยังผู้ดูแลระบบเมื่อถึงเวลาตั้งเตือนตามที่กำหนดหากตรวจพบว่าไม่มีเทปอยู่ในเครื่องบันทึก
]]>ให้แน่ใจว่าคุณได้ใส่เทปสำรองข้อมูลที่ต้องการในเครื่องอ่านเทปก่อนที่จะดำเนินการต่อ
หลังจากเรียกคืนเสร็จสมบูรณ์คุณจะต้องรีบู๊ตเซิร์ฟเวอร์
]]>เฉพาะไฟล์ที่มีการทำเครื่องหมาย[บันทึก] อยู่ข้างใน
จะการตรวจสอบนี้จะทำกับไฟล์ที่เก็บไว้ที่ : ]]>
ให้เลือกการไฟล์ข้อมูลสำรองที่ถูกต้องเพื่อดำเนินการด้านล่างนี้
หลังจากการเรียกคืนข้อมูลสำรองเสร็จสมบูรณ์ คุณจะต้องรูบู๊ตเซิร์ฟเวอร์
เรียกคืนข้อมูลสำรองจาก : ]]>หน้าจอถัดไปจะมีการแสดงไฟล์และไดเรกทอรีเพื่อจะให้คุณระบุสิ่งที่ต้องเรียกคืน คุณสามารถจำกัดจำนวนไฟล์และไดเรกทอรีที่ปรากฏในหน้าจอนั้นโดยการตั้งเงื่อนไขข้อมูลที่จะให้แสดง, applied as a regular expression to the displayed names.
เป็นสิ่งที่พึงระวังและคุณต้องรับทราบความเสี่ยงว่า การเรียกคืนข้อมูลเช่นนี้นี้อาจทำให้เซอร์ฟเวอร์ทำงานผิดปกติ หรือไม่สามารถทำงานได้
ขณะนี้ จะเป็นการเรียกคืนไฟล์ข้อมูลสำรองจาก : ]]>
คุณแน่ใจหรือว่าต้องการลบโดเมนนี้?
]]>ตั้งค่า DNS ขององค์กร
]]>Delegate mail servers
เซิร์ฟเวอร์ของคุณมีคุณสมบัติของเมล์เซอร์ฟเวอร์ที่ครบสมบูรณ์ อย่างไรก็ตาม คุณยังมีบางเหตุผลที่ทำให้คุณต้องเลือกส่งงานจัดการอีเมล์ไปยังเซิร์ฟเวอร์ตัวอื่น ให้ระบุหมายเลข IP ของเซิร์ฟเวอร์ที่จะทำงานนี้แทนที่นี่ โดยปกติการใช้งานทั้่วไปแล้วจะไม่ต้องกรอกข้อมูลช่องนี้ ]]>ตั้งค่า ETRN หรือ multi-drop
สำหรับ ETRN หรือ multi-drop ให้ระบุชื่อโฮสต์หรือหมายเลข IP ของเมล์เซิร์ฟเวอร์สำรองของคุณ (หากเลือใช้แบบมาตรฐานสามารถปล่อยฟิลด์นี้ว่างไว้ได้) ]]>เซิร์ฟเวอร์ SMTP
เซิร์ฟเวอร์สามารถส่งข้อความไปยังปลายทางต่างๆ ได้เอง (แนะนำให้ใช้ในกรณีทั่วไป) หรือให้ส่งผ่านเซิร์ฟเวอร์ SMPT ของผู้ให้บริการอินเตอร์เน็ต (ISP) ของคุณ (แนะนำให้ใช้หากคุณใช้การเชื่อมต่อที่ไม่ค่อยเสถียรหรือใช้บริการอินเตอร์เน็ตสำหรับบ้านพักอาศัย) หากคุณเลือกใช้การส่งผ่านเซิร์ฟเวอร์ SMPT ของผู้ให้บริการอินเตอร์เน็ต ให้คุณระบุชื่อโฮสต์หรือ IP ของเซอร์ฟเวอร์ของผู้บริการนั้นด้านล่าง หากไม่ใช่ให้ปล่อยว่างไว้ ]]>การรับอีเมล์
]]>E-mail delivery
]]>คุณแน่ใจหรือว่าต้องการลบชื่อโฮสต์นี้ ? ]]>
คุณสามารถลบ หรือเปลี่นรหัสผ่าน information bay ใดๆ โดยการคลิ๊กคำสั่งถัดจากรายชื่อของ information bay นั้นๆ ถ้ารายการ information bay ใดเป็นสีแดงแสดงว่ายังไม่ได้เปลี่ยนรหัสผ่านจากค่าปริยายเป็นอย่างอื่น และควารทำการเปลี่ยนให้เร็วที่สุด
]]>ทุกไฟล์ใน information bay นี้จะถูกลบทั้งหมด
คุณแน่ใจหรือว่าต้องการจะลบ information นี้?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server ถือกำเนิดขึ้นภายใต้ "โลกแห่งอิสระ" ของลิขสิทธิ์แบบ GNU General Public License และจะเป็นแบบเดียวเท่านั้นที่มันจะเป็น และโดยการอุทิศความอุตสาหะพยายามของบรรดาผู้คนในสังคมของ SME Server. อย่างไรก็ตาม คุณสมบัติและคุณภาพของ SME Server ก็สัมพันธ์กับความสามารถในการจ่ายค่าใช้จ่ายต่างๆ เช่น ค่าเช่าโฮส ค่าอุปกรณ์เซอร์ฟเวอร์ และอื่นๆ
โดยเหตุนี้ เราจึงเปิดรับและขอการสนับสนุนโดยการบริจาค ซึ่งไม่ต้องจำเป็นต้องเป็นเงินจำนวนที่มากมาย เพื่อใช้จ่ายในเรื่องเหล่านี้ และเพื่อเป็นทุนในการพัฒนาต่อๆ ไปในอนาคต
โปรดเข้าไปที่ http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ เพื่อให้การบริจาคสนับสนุนแก่เรา
ซอร์ฟแวร์นี้ไม่มีการรับประกันการใช้งานใดๆ โปรด คลิกที่นี่ เพื่อดูข้อมูลในการสนับสนุนการใช้งาน รายละเอียดการรับประกัน และเงื่อนไขลิขสิทธิ์
เลือกงานระบบที่ต้องการจัดการ ทำโดยคลิ๊กลิงค์ที่เมนูด้านซ้ายของคุณ
]]>คลิกที่นี่ เพื่อดูรายการงานที่ผู้บริหารระบสามารถจัดการได้
]]>เพิ่มเครือข่าย ]]>
"เราเตอร์" ต้องเป็นหมายเลข IP ของเราเตอร์ในฝั่งเครือข่ายของคุณ ซึ่งเป็นจุดที่เครือข่ายใหม่นั้นจะเชื่อมผ่านเข้ามา
]]>เซิร์ฟเวอร์ของคุณจะให้สิทธิ์การเข้าถึงบริการภายในแก่หมายเลข IP จำนวน {$totalHosts} หมายเลข คือหมายเลขจาก {$firstAddr} ถึง {$lastAddr}
คำเตือน: โปรแกรม ProFTPd FTP server ไม่สามารถเข้าใจ subnet mask ที่ไม่เข้ามาตรฐานนี้ ตัวเลือกที่ไม่ยุ่งยากที่น่าจะใช้แทนได้คือ {$simpleMask}
]]>การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์
ซอฟต์แวร์นี้ผลิตขึ้นภายใต้เงื่อนไขที่ประกาศไว้ใน การบริการและลิขสิทธิ์ ]]>คำเตือน: การใช้งานคุณสมบัตินี้อย่างไม่ถูกต้อง สามารถทำให้ระดับความปลอดภัยของระบบของคุณอ่อนแอลง โปรดอย่าใช้คุณสมบัตินี้ด้วยความชะล่าใจ หรือโดยโดยขาดความเข้าใจอย่างชัดเจนในผลกระทบของการกระทำนี้
]]>ควรหลีกเลี่ยงชื่อและคำอธิบายที่มีคำเหล่านี้ "offline", "disabled", "down", "off", "waiting", "jam", "paper", "error" และ "responding".
ชื่อเครื่องพิมพ์ต้องมีเพียงตัวอักษรภาษาอังกฤษตัวพิมพ์เล็กและตัวเลข และต้องเริ่มต้นด้วยตัวอักษร ตัวอย่างเช่น "hplaser", "epsonlp" และ "canonbj"
]]>นามแฝงเปิดโอกาสให้คุณสร้างชื่อเรียกอื่นให้แก่ผู้ใช้หรือกลุ่มที่มีอยู่ เช่น คุณอาจต้องการสร้างนามแฝง "webmaster" ให้แก่กลุ่ม "webdevelopers" หรือ สร้างนามแฝง "joe" ให้กับผู้ใช้ "joseph" เป็นต้น
ปกติเซอร์ฟเวอร์จะสร้างนามแฝงอัตโนมัติในชื่อ firstname.lastname และ firstname_lastname ให้กับทุกรายผู้ใช้อยู่แล้ว รวมถึงมีนามแฝง "everyone" ที่หมายถึงผู้ใช้ทุกคนในระบบอีกชื่อ
นามแฝงเ้ปิดโอกาสให้คุณสร้างนามแฝงเป็นอีเมล์แทนให้ "ผู้ใช้ของโดเมนเสมือน (virtual domains)" ต่างๆ ที่มีอยู่ในเซอร์ฟเวอร์นี้ได้ด้วย เช่น คุณสามารถส่งผ่านอีเมล์ที่เข้ามาถึง "sales@virtualdomain1.com" ไปยังผู้ใช้ชื่อ "mary" และ "sales@virtualdomain2.com" ไปยังผู้ใช้ชื่อ "john" เป็นต้น โดยคุณจะต้องสร้างโดเมนและผู้ใช้ขึ้นก่อนการสร้างอีเมล์แทนนี้
และสามารถส่งผ่านจากนามแฝงสามารถไปยังนามแฝงได้ด้วยอื่นได้ด้วย เพียงแต่มันจำกัดไว้ให้ทำการส่งผ่านทำได้เพียงชั้นเดียวเท่านั้น เช่น นามแฝง "webmaster" สามารถส่งผ่านไปยัง "techsupport" แล้วค่อยส่งผ่านไปยังผู้ใช้ "ray" อีกที ความสามารถนี้มีประโยชน์ที่ทำให้สามารถสร้างกฎเกณฑ์ได้หลายอย่างให้ผู้ใช้หนึ่งราย ทำให้สามารถเปลี่ยนนามแฝงแก่ผู้ใช้รายเดิมได้หลายครั้ง เช่น กรณีผู้ใช้มีการเปลี่ยนแผนกหรือสังกัดเป็นต้น
คุณสามารถแก้ไขหรือลบนามแฝงโดยคลิ๊กลิงค์คำสั่งที่อยู่ถัดจากนามแฝงนั้นๆ
]]>โปรดทราบว่าอาจใช้เวลาหลายนาทีเพื่อสร้างรายงานเหล่านี้
]]>ถ้าผู้ใช้นั้นใช้งานพื้นที่จนถึงระดับ "จำกัดระยะผ่อนผัน" (Limit with grace period) ระบบก็จะเริ่มส่งคำเตือนให้ผู้ใช้นั้น ถ้าถูกเตือนอยู่นานเกินหนึ่งสัปดาห์ หรือถ้ามีการใช้จำนวนพื้นที่จนถึงระดับ "จำกัดสุทธิ" (Absolute limit) แล้ว ผู้ใช้นั้นจะไม่สามารถบันทึกไฟล์หรือรับเมล์ที่เข้ามาได้อีก
ตั้งค่าเป็น '0' หากไม่ต้องการจำกัดโควต้าให้ผู้ใช้นั้นๆ
พื้นที่ใช้งานนี้นับรวมพื้นที่ในโฮมไดเร็คทอรีของผู้ใช้ (user's home directory), อีเมล์, และไฟล์ที่อยู่ใน information bays ที่ผู้ใช้นั้นเป็นเจ้าของ ]]>
ตั้งค่า Secure Shell
คุณสามารถควบคุมการเข้าถึงแบบ ของเซิร์ฟเวอร์นี้ของคุณได้ การเปิดให้เข้าถึงแบบสาธารณะควรเปิดให้ใช้เฉพาะกับผู้ดูแลระบบที่มีความชำนาญ เพื่อใช้ในการตรวจสอบหาและแก้ไขความผิดปกติของระบบจากภายนอก เราแนะนำให้คุณปล่อยเป็น "No Access" เอาไว้ตามค่าตั้งต้น ยกเว้นหากคุณมีความประสงค์เป็นอย่างอื่น ]]>FTP Settings
คุณสามารถควบคุมการเข้าถึง FTP ของเซิร์ฟเวอร์นี้ของคุณ เราแนะนำให้ปล่อยค่าให้เป็น 'no access' เอาไว้ยกเว้นหากคุณมีเหตุผลในการตั้งค่าเป็นอย่างอื่นหมายเหตุ: การการตั้งค่าเหล่านี้จะเป็นการจำกัดการเข้าถึงเซิร์ฟเวอร์ และจะมีผลเหนือการตั้งค่าอื่นๆ รวมถึงค่าที่ตั้งไว้ของ information bays แต่ละตัวด้วย
]]>ตั้งค่า PPTP
คุณสามารถให้เข้าถึงเซิร์ฟเวอร์นี้ผ่าน PPTP ได้ กรอกตัวเลขจำนวนการเข้าถึงผ่าน PPTP สูงสุดที่ต้องการเปิดที่นี่ หรือกรอก 0 หากต้องการปิดการใช้งาน ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
คุณสามารถเปิดให้โฮสต์จาก remote networks สามารถเข้าถึงเซิร์ฟเวอร์นี้ได้โดยกรอกข้อมูลเครือข่ายเหล่านั้นด้านล่าง Use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 to limit the access to the specified host. Any hosts within the specified range will be able to access the server manager using HTTPS.
]]>Serial console
คุณสามารถเปิดใช้งาน server console จากเทอร์มินัลที่ต่อกับซีเรียลพอร์ตของเซิร์ฟเวอร์ได้ ]]>การตั้งค่า telnet
คำเตือน: ขณะนี้การเข้าถึงแบบ telnet ถูกเปิดไว้ แต่คุณสมบัตินี้ไม่ได้รับการสนับสนุนให้ใช้แล้ว การเข้าถึงแบบ telnet มีความไม่ปลอดภัยในตัวของมันและควรถูกใช้ในกรณีที่ไม่ทางเลือกอื่นที่ดีกว่า คุณควรเลือกตั้งให้เป็น {$NO_ACCESS} และใช้งาน secure shell แทนหากจไเป็นต้องใช้การ remote access, Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>คุณสามารถเว้นช่องว่างใดก็ๆ หากคุณไม่ต้องการได้
บรรทัดข้อความที่ท่านป้อนด้านล่างจะถูกจัดรูปแบบให้เป็นหน้าเว็บ เว้นบรรทัดเมื่อต้องการเริ่มต้นย่อหน้าใหม่ หากคุณต้องการขึ้นบรรทัดใหม่โดยไม่ต้องขึ้นเป็นย่อหน้า (ตัวอย่างเช่น หลังจากที่แต่ละบรรทัดของที่อยู่เมล์) ให้พิมพ์ตัวอักษร 4 ตัวคือ
<BR>ในตำแหน่งที่ต้องการขึ้นบรรทัดใหม่
อย่าใช้ตัวเลือกนี้ หากคุณมีเว็บอยู่แล้ว เพราะมันจะเขียนทับไฟล์ "index.htm" ในไดเรกทอรีของเว็บไซท์ของคุณ
]]>คุณต้องการดำเนินการต่อหรือไม่?
]]>คุณสามารถแก้ไข ล็อค ลบ หรือรีเซ็ตรหัสผ่านโดยการคลิ๊กคำสั่งที่อยู่ถัดจากชื่อบัญชี
ถ้าบัญชีใดถูกล็อค คุณต้องทำการรีเซ็ตรหัสผ่านของบัญชีนั้นเพื่อปลดล็อค หมายเหตุ ทุกบัญชีที่ทำการสร้างใหม่จะถูกล็อคจนกว่าจะทำการรีเซ็ตรหัสผ่าน
]]>หมายเหตุ: จะมีการสร้างนามแฝงให้บัญชีที่สร้างใหม่นี้ 2 ชื่อ นามแฝงเหล่านี้จะเป็นตัวเลือกสำหรับการระบุชื่อในการรับ/ส่งอีเมล์อีกทาง โดยจะสร้างจากการนำชื่อต้นมาต่อกับชื่อหลังโดยใช้เครื่องหมายจุด (.) คั่นกลาง ส่วนอีกนามแฝงจะคั่นด้วยยติภังค์ (_) เช่น บัญชีีชื่อ "betty" ที่มีชื่อต้นเป็น "Betty" และชื่อหลังเป็น "Rubble" นามแฝงทั้งสองจะเป็น betty.rubble และ betty_rubble
ส่วนข้อมูลส่วนสังกัด (แผนก, บริษัท และอื่นๆ) สามารถแก้จากค่าปริยายที่ให้มาเป็นอย่างอื่นได้ ซึ่งจะส่งผลเฉพาะกับผู้ใช้รายนี้เท่านั้น
]]>คุณมั่นแล้วหรือที่จะทำการล็อคบัญชีผู้ใช้นี้? ]]>
คุณมั่นแล้วหรือที่จะทำการลบบัญชีผู้ใช้นี้? ]]>
ประเภทของรายงานไม่ถูกต้อง "{$filename}"
]]>ระบบถูกปรับปรุงให้เป็นรุ่นล่าสุดแล้ว
รายการอัพเดตทั้งหมดถูกติดตั้งเรียบร้อยแล้ว ]]>มีอัพเดตมาใหม่
มีรายการอัพเดตใหม่สำหรับระบบของคุณ อัพเดตเหล่านั้นควรถูกติดตั้งให้เร็วที่สุดเท่าที่เป็นไปได้ ]]>หากคุณไม่สามารถเปลี่ยนรหัสผ่านของคุณเนื่องจากคุณลืมรหัสผ่านเก่า ผู้ที่จะสามารถรีเซ็ตรหัสผ่านของคุณได้คือผู้ดูแลระบบของเซอร์ฟเวอร์นี้ ผ่าน server manager
]]>İlk yöntem ayar ve kullanıcı dosyalarınızın yedeğini oluşturup, web gezginiyle masaüstünüze kaydetmeyi sağlar. Mevcut ayar ve kullanıcı dosyalarınız yaklaşık olarak $tarsize yer kaplar. Yedekleme dosyası bundan daha az yer kaplar, ne kadar sıkıştırıldığına bağlı. \"Masaüstü yedeklemesini doğrula\" seçeneği masaüstünüze yüklenen yedeğin içeriğini bütünlüğünü doğrular.
Teyip yedeklemesi ise $module programını kullanarak sunucunuzun yedeğini her gece teybe kaydetmek için kullanır . Bu işlem için tanımlanan bir teyip sürücüsü ve yazılabilir bir kaset gerekir. Yedekleme belirtilen saatte her gece otomatik olarak yapılır (hatırlatıcı kullanılırsa her gün yöneticiye hatırlatma e-postası gönderilir). Diskinizdeki mevcut veri iktarı $dumpsize .
Her iki geri yükleme yöntemi hem sunucu ayarlarını hem de kullanıcı dosyalarını geri yüklemeyi sağlar. En iyisi, geri yükleme işlemi yeni kurulum yapılmış sunucuda yapmaktır.
]]>Tape Backup. This method uses a software package called $module to back up your entire hard disk to tape every night. This requires a supported tape drive and a tape that is not write-protected. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every night (with a reminder automatically e-mailed to the administrator during the day). Currently your hard disk contains $dumpsize of data.
Workstation backup. This method uses a software package called dar to back up your server configuration and data files to a network share or a local removable disk such as a USB disk. You can manage how many rotating sets of backups are kept, and how many incremental backups to have in each set. The backup is performed automatically at the selected time every day. Currently configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize uncompressed. Twice the compressed data size must be available on the backup share.
Backup to Desktop. This method creates a copy of your server configuration and user data files, and downloads it to your local desktop via your web browser. Currently your configuration and data files total approximately $tarsize. The backup file will be somewhat less than this, depending on how much the data can be compressed. This file can be used to restore the server from the console if you copy it to a local removable disk such as a USB disk.
All backup methods allow you to restore your configuration and user data files. Workstation backup provides individual file restore. Ideally, full restore should be performed on a freshly installed server.
]]>Teyip sürücüsüne desteklediği bant tipini yerleştirmeniz gerkmektedir. Teyip sürücüsü boş olursa hatırlatıcı, sistem yöneticisini bant yerleştirmesi için uyaracaktır.
]]>İstenen yedekleme bantını teyibe yerleştirdiğinizden emin olun.
Geri yükleme tamamlandıktan sonra sunucuyu yeniden başlatmanız gerekmektedir.
]]>Sadece [Kaydedildi] diye işaretlenen dosyalar yedekte yer almaktadır.
Yedek dosyaları paylaşılan bu klasörden kontrol edilecektir : ]]>
Geri yükleme yapmadan önce doğru yedeklemeyi seçtiğinizden emin olun.
Geri yükleme tamamlandıktan sonra sunucuyu yeniden başlatmanız gerekmektedir.
Geri yüklenecek yedek : ]]>Sonraki panel dosya ve klasör isimlerini size gösterecektir, geri yüklemek istediğinizi seçiniz. Gösterilecek dosya ve klasör sayısını kısıtlamak için, sonuçlara ifade filtreleme yapabilirsiniz, gösterilecek isimler düzenli ifaderle sınırlandırılabilir .
Suncunuzun çalışmasını bozacak dosyaları geri yükleme sorumluluğu sizdedir.
Geri yüklenecek, dosyaların yeri : ]]>
Alan adı ekle ]]>
Bu alan adını silmek istediğinizden eminmisiniz?
]]>Kurumsal DNS Ayarları
]]>Atanmış posta sunucuları
Sunucunuz, eksiksiz bir e-posta sunucusunun tüm özelliklerine sahiptir . Ancak başka bir mail sunucusu atamak isterseniz IP adresini burada yazılmalıdır. Normal işlemler için boş bırakın. ]]>ETRN veya multi-drop ayarları
ETRN veya multi-drop kullanmak için, ikincil e-posta sunucusunun alan adını veya IP adresini belirtin. (Standart ayarlar kullanılacaksa bu alan boş bırakılmalıdır.) ]]>SMTP sunucu
Sunucu gönderilen mesajları kendi üzerinden yollar (çoğu durumda önerilir) veya ISPnisin SMTP sunucusu yoluyla iletilir (bu seçenek güvenilir olmayan internet bağlantınız varsa, sürekli kopmalar oluyorsa ve iyi bir ISPye sahipseniz tercih edebilirsiniz).Eğer ISPnizin SMTP sunucusunu kullanacaksanız alan adını veya IP sini aşağıya yazın. Yoksa boş bırakın. ]]>E-posta alımı
]]>E-posta yönlendirme
]]>Bu alan adını silmek istediğinizden eminmisiniz? ]]>
Herhangi bir i-bay'ı silmek için, o i-bayın sonundaki komutları seçmelisiniz. Eğer i-bay kırmızı renkte gösteriliyorsa, standart şifre değerinin değiştirilmediğini göstermektedir, en yakın zamanda şifrenin değiştirilmesi gerekmektedir.
]]>bu i-baydaki bütün bilgiler silinecektir.
Bu i-bay'ı silmek istediğinizden eminmisiniz?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server, GNU Genel Kamu Lisansı altında ve SME Server topluluğu aracılığıyla devam ettirilmektedir. SME Server Linuxun kalitesinin artması ve projenin devam edebilmesi giderlerimize bağlıdır, sunucu ücreti, seunucu donanımı vb.
Bu nedenle, maliyetleri karşılamak için küçük bir bağış bekliyoruz.
Lütfen http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ bağışta bulunun.
Bu yazılımın KESİNLİKE GARANTİSİ YOKTUR. Lütfen buraya tıklayarak destek, garanti ve lisans bilgilerine gözatın.
Sistemi yönetmeye başlamak için ekranın solundaki menüden bir linke tıklayın.
]]>Sistem Yönetim paneli içinburaya tıklayın.
]]>Ağ ekle ]]>
Ek ağ ulaşmanızı sağlayan "Router" IP adresi, sunucunuzun ağ adresi aralığında yer almalıdır. ]]>
Sunucunuz {$firstAddr} den {$lastAddr} kadar olan toplam {$totalHosts} IP adresine yerel erişim hizmeti tanıyacaktır.
Dikkat: ProFTPd FTP sunucusu bu standart olmayan alt ağ maskesini kullanamaz. Bunun yerine standart {$simpleMask} alt ağ maskesini kullanacaktır.
]]>Destek ve Lisanslama
Bu yazılımın kullanım süreci Destek ve Lisanslama sayfasında belirtilmiştir. ]]>DİKKAT: Bu yerel ağınızsa sızmalara sebep olabilir. Bu işlemin sonuçlarını tam anlamadan kullanmamanız önerilir.
]]>Yazıcı adı sadece küçük harf ve rakamlardan oluşmalı ve küçük hrfle başlamalıdır. Örneğin "hplaser", "epsonlp" ve "canonbj" gibi.
]]>Mevcut kullanıcı ve gruplar için takma adlar tanımlanabilir. Örneğin, web tasrımcılarınız için "webmaster" adında takma ad tanımlamak isteyebilirsiniz veya "joseph" isimli kullanıcı için "joe" takma adını tanımlayabilirsiniz.
Sunucunuz otomatik olarak ad.soyad ve ad_soyad takma adını oluşturur ve "everyone" adında bütün kullanıcıları kapsayan takma ad oluşturulur.
Sisteminizde barındırılan alanlar ve kullanıcılar için e-posta adları için de takma adlar tanımlayabilirsiniz. Örneğin "mary" isimli kullanıcıya "sales@virtualdomain1.com" adresini yönlendirmek ve "john" isimli kullanıcıya "sales@virtualdomain2.com" adresi yönlendirilebilir. E-posta adları oluşturulmadan önce barındırıcı ve kullanıcı adları oluşturulmalı.
Takma adını bir başka takma ada yönlendirilebilir, bu özellik sınırlıdır. Örneğin "webmaster" takma adı "techsupport" takma adına yönlendirilebilir bu da "ray" isimli kullanıcıya yönlendirilebilir. Bu durum bir kullanıcı organizasyon içerisinde birden fazla görev üstlendiğinde kullanışlı olur.
Takma adları değiştirmek veya silmek için adın sonundaki ilgili seçeneği seçin.
]]>Bu raporların oluşturulması birkaç dakika sürebileceğini gözönünde bulundurmalısınız
]]>Kullanıcı "süreli limiti" aşarsa ona uyarı gönderilecektir. Bu süre 1 haftadan daha uzun sürerse veya "kesin limit" aşılırsa kullanıcı daha fazla dosya depolayamayacaktır ve e-posta alamayacaktır.
İlgili kullanıcı için "0" limit değeri verilirse limit yok anlamına gelir.
Her kullanıcının kotası; kullanıcı ev dizini, e-posta ve sahip olduğu i-bayları içerir. ]]>
ssh Ayarları
Sunucunuza ssh erişimini kontrol edebilirsiniz. Genel erişim sadece deneyimli yneticilerin sorun tespit ve çözümleri için aktifleştirilmelidir. Geçerli bir sebep yoksa "Erişim yok" olarak ayarlamanız önerilir. ]]>FTP Ayarları
Sunucunuzun FTP erişimini kontrol edebilirsiniz. Bir zorunluluk olmadığı sürece 'erişim yok' seçeneğini seçmenizi öneririz .Not: bu ayarlar sunucu erişimini sınırlar ve diğer erişim ayarlarını etkiler, özgün i-bayları da kapsar.
]]>PPTP Ayarları
Sunucunuza PPTP erişimine izin verebilirsiniz. Eğer PPTP erişimi vermek istemiyorsanız 0 değerini vermeniz yeterlidir. ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
Uzaktaki bir sistemden, yönetim arabirime erişim izni verebilirsiniz. Alt ağ maskesi olarak 255.255.255.255 girin. HTTPS kullanarak belirtilen ağ aralığındaki herhangi bir sistemden erişim sağlanabilir.
]]>Konsol
Sunucuya seri porttan bağlı bir terminalden konsol erişimi verebilirsiniz.]]>Telnet Ayarları
DİKKAT: Telnet erişimi etkin, fakat bu özellik artık kullanılmayacaktır. Telnet güvenli olmadığı için sadece başka bir alternatif bulunmadığında kullanılmalıdır. Seçimi {$NO_ACCESS} olarak değiştirip bağlantı için ssh kullanılmalıdır. Telnet inaktif edildiğinde, artık bu sayfa görünmeyecektir. ]]>İhtiyaç duymadığınız yerleri boş geçebilirsiniz.
Yazdıklarınızın güzel görünmesi için satırlar kaydırılacaktır. Yeni paragrafa başlamak için boş bir satır bırakın. Yeni paragraf oluşturmadan aşağı satıra geçmek için (örneğin her sayıra bir e-posta adresi) bu dört karakteri yazın
<BR>.
Dikkat daha önceden web sitenizi oluşturduysanız bu seçeneği kullanmayın, yoksa sitenizin "index.htm" dosyası üzerine yazılacaktır.
]]>Devam etmek istediğinizden eminmisiniz?
]]>Herhangi bir hesapta değişiklik yapmak, kilitlemek, şifresini değiştirmek veya şifresini sıfırlamak için ilgili hesabın sonundaki butonlara tıklayın.
Eğer kullanıcı durumu kiltli görünüyorsa, bu kullanıcının şifresi sıfırlanmalıdır. Yeni oluşturulan hesaplar, şifresi değiştirilene kadar kilitlidir.
]]>Her yeni hesap için iki takma ad atandığını unutmayın. Bu takma adlar kullanıcı için alternatif e-posta kutuları oluşturur, kullanıcının adı ve soyadı arasında nokta (.) ve altçizgi (_) konarak oluşturulur. Örneğin "betty" kullanıcısını ilk adı "Betty" ve soyadı "Rubble" ise e-posta için iki takma ad oluşturulacaktır betty.rubble ve betty_rubble.
Adres defteri bilgileri (departman, şirket vb.) aşağıda değiştirilebilri. Bu bilgiler sadece bu kullanıcı için geçerli olacaktır.
]]>Hesabı kiltlemek istediğinizden eminmisiniz? ]]>
Bu kullanıcı hesabını silmek istediğinizden eminmisiniz? ]]>
"{$filename}" dosyası geçersiz log içeriyor.
]]>Sistem günceldir.
Bütün güncellemeler yüklüdür. ]]>Yeni Güncellemeler Mevcut
Sisteminiz için yeni güncellemeler mevcuttur. Bunları en kısa sürede yüklrmrniz önerilir. ]]>Eski şifrenizi unuttuysanız yeni şifre atayamazsınız, sistem yöneticiniz sistem yönetimi.
]]>第一种方法是通过浏览器，创建一份服务器和用户配置的副本，然后下载到本地工作站。当前配置和数据文件一共大约 $tarsize。备份文件会实际略小于此数字，这取决于压缩比例。 \"检查备份文件\" 选项用于检查备份文件的完整性。
磁带备份是在每天晚上使用一个叫$module的软件包备份整个硬盘。这要求使用未被写保护的磁带。在每天晚上的指定时间，备份就会自动运行。(白天会自动发送邮件提醒给管理员). 当前硬盘的数据大小共计$dumpsize 。
两种还原方式都可以把您的配置和用户数据还原。 理论上，还原操作只应该发生在新安装系统的裸机上。.
]]>磁带备份。这种方法使用软件包$module 每天夜里备份整个硬盘到磁带去。需要一个驱动支持且未被写保护的磁带。备份会在每天选定的时间自动运行 (白天会有一个自动邮件提醒发往管理员)。 当前硬盘数据量为 $dumpsize 。
工作站备份。这种备份方式使用一个叫 dar 的软件来备份服务器配置和数据到网络共享或者USB移动硬盘。您可以设置保留多少个完整备份，以及每个完整备份包含多少次增量备份。备份会在每天选定的时间自动运行。当前未压缩的数据大约有 $tarsize 。备份介质需要准备两倍的容量。
备份到桌面。这种方法会将数据打包，然后通过浏览器下载到您的桌面。当前未压缩的数据大约有 $tarsize。备份文件会比实际数据小一些，取决于压缩比率。如果把这个备份文件拷贝到USB移动硬盘，那么也可以从服务器的终端界面来执行还原任务。
所有备份方法都允许您完整的还原数据。工作站备份提供独立的文件存储。理论上讲，完全还原只应该在新服务器上执行。
]]>磁带备份需要系统支持的磁带类型。如果磁带驱动器内为空，在指定的提醒时间，系统将会向管理员发送一个提醒邮件。
]]>在执行之前，请确保加载的是合适的备份。
当还原完成后，必须重启服务器生效。
]]>只有标记为 [Saved] 的文件才会包含在备份中。
备份文件已被检查，文件来自于共享文件夹 : ]]>
在执行还原操作之前，确保选择正确的备份。
还原过后，您必须重新启动服务器。
备份还原文件来自 : ]]>之后的面板将会显示可用的文件和目录，因此，您可以在其中选择需要还原的文件或目录。为了限制面板中显示的文件和目录数量，这里还有一个现成的过滤选项。
您有义务保证在还原后服务器相关功能配置不被覆盖。
现在，文件还原将从: ]]>
添加域名 ]]>
是否真的要删除这个域名？
]]>Corporate DNS 设置
]]>修改DNS设置 ]]>
Delegate mail servers
服务器包含一个完整的、全功能的电子邮件服务器。但是，如果由于某种原因您想委托另一个处理系统处理电子邮件，请指定委托系统的IP地址。一般情况下，请将此字段留空。 ]]>ETRN或者multi-drop设置/h2>对于ETRN或者multi-drop,请指定辅助邮件服务器的主机名或者IP地址。（对于标准的E-mail设置，请将此字段留空。） ]]>
SMTP服务器
此服务器能直接将出站邮件投递到目的地（大多数情况下建议如此）或通过ISP的SMTP服务器投递（如果您的因特网连接不太可靠或者您正使用的是家用的因特网服务）。如果使用ISP的SMTP服务器，请在下面指定其主机名或者IP地址。否则，请留空。 ]]>电子邮件接收
]]>电子邮件投递
]]>是否真的要删除这个主机名？ ]]>
您可以移除任何信息港或点击信息港边相应的命令来重置其密码。如果信息港显示为红色，则表示其密码为默认，没有修改过，因此应该尽快修改。
]]>此i-bay的所有文件都将被删除。
是否真的要删除此i-bay？
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server在GNU通用公共许可证下免费使用，并通过SME Server社区提供支持。SME Server的可用性和可靠性取决于主机托管环境，服务器硬件配置等等。
因此，我们需要您的捐赠和资助，用于日常开支和深入开发。
请访问http://www.smeserver.org/donate/ 来资助我们。
这是个自由软件。请 点击此处 查看支持细节、保证和许可信息 。
要查看系统管理功能列表，请点击屏幕左侧菜单上的链接。
]]>点击此处查看系统管理功能列表。
]]>添加网络地址 ]]>
"Router" 应该是本地网络上的路由器的IP地址，通过此地址外部网络可以访问本地网络。 ]]>
服务器将赋予在{$firstAddr} 和{$lastAddr}之间的{$totalHosts}个IP地址访问本地网络的权限。
警告: ProFTPd FTP 服务器不能处理这种非标准的子网掩码。 简单的说明 {$simpleMask} 将会被替代。
]]>支持和许可
此软件根据位于 支持和许可 页面的条款发布。 ]]>警告：滥用此功能可能会严重威胁本地网络安全。如果您不完全理解操作将带来的后果，请不要轻易使用此功能，
]]>打印机名称应该只包含小写字母和数字，并以一个小写字母开头。例如，"hplaser"，"epsonlp"， 和"canonbj"都是有效的名称。
]]>别名可以为已存在的用户或组创建其他名称。例如，您想要为"webdevelopers"组创建别名"webmaster"，或者为用户"joseph"创建别名"joe"。
服务器会自动为系统中的用户创建别名，格式为名字.姓氏和名字_姓氏,别名 "everyone"包括了系统中的所有用户。
别名也可以为有效的（虚拟）域和用户创建e-mail别名。例如，您可以转发"sales@virtualdomain1.com"到用户 "mary" ,"sales@virtualdomain2.com" 到用户 "john"。在创建e-mail别名之前，您必须先创建好域和用户账号。
别名也可以转发到其他别名。例如，别名 "webmaster" 可以转发到别名"techsupport",别名"techsupport"又可以转发到指定用户"ray"。当一个用户有多个角色时这是很有用的，并且节省了该用户离开时带来的时间消耗。
通过点击别名边上的相应命令，您可以编辑或者删除该别名。
]]>请注意，生成这些报表可能要花费一些时间。
]]>如果用户超过了“有宽限额度的限制”，系统将会生成警告。如果超过了一周的宽限期或者已到了“绝对限制”，那么用户将无法存储任何文件或者接受任何电子邮件。
设置为0则表示对相应用户禁用磁盘配额。
每个用户的磁盘空间，包括用户目录、电子邮件和该用户在i-bays中所拥有的任何文件。 ]]>
SSH设置
您可以控制服务器的SSH访问。为了进行远程故障诊断和解决，开放设置只应由有经验的管理员来启用。除非您有特别的理由，否则建议此处设置为"无法访问"。]]>FTP设置
您可以控制服务器的 FTP 访问。 除非您有特别的理由，否则建议此处设置为"无法访问"。注意: 此设置会限制访问服务器，同时会覆盖包括个人信息港的其他设置。
]]>PPTP设置
您可以允许PPTP访问服务器。除非您需要PPTP访问，否则请将其参数设置为0，禁用此功能。 ]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
在下面输入外部网络的主机IP，将允许这些主机远程访问server manager。使用子网掩码255.255.255.255以允许指定主机的访问。任何指定范围内的主机均通过使用HTTPS来访问server manager。
]]>串口控制台
您可以允许一个终端通过串口连接来访问系统控制台。]]>Telnet设置
警告: Telnet当前被启用，但此特性已不被支持了。Telnet本来就是不安全的，仅仅在没有可替代方案的情况下使用。您应该设置为 {$NO_ACCESS} ，如果远程需要访问，请使用SSH。一旦禁用，telnet将不会在屏幕上出现。 ]]>可以将任何不需要的字段留空 。
在下面输入的文本将在网页中加以修饰后显示出来。每当要另起段落，请输入一个空行。如果要强制分开一行又不想另起段落（例如每行一个电子邮件地址），可以在任意行中输入4个字符序列
<BR>。
如果已经建好了网站， 请勿使用该选项 因为这将覆盖网站目录中的"index.htm"文件。
]]>是否继续？
]]>您可以修改、锁定或者移除任何账号，或者通过点击账号边上的相应命令来重置账号密码。
如果账号标记为被锁，就意味着该需要重置该用户的密码。请注意，新建账号会自动锁定，直至其密码变更。
]]>注意，每个新账户会有两个别名。这些别名可以替代邮件账号（包含姓名的那种）。因此账户"betty"（姓"Betty"，名"Rubble"）的两个别名是“betty.rubble”和“betty_rubble”。
目录信息(部门、公司等)可以在下面更改。更改只对该用户有效。
]]>您确定锁定此账户吗? ]]>
确认删除此账户吗? ]]>
无效的报表类型 "{$filename}"。
]]>系统已更新至最新。
所有更新都已被安装。 ]]>有可用的更新
您的系统有可用的更新。这些更新需要尽快安装。 ]]>如果您不能修改密码，那是因为可能您忘记了旧密码，您的系统管理员使用系统管理可以重置您的密码 。
]]>第一種方式是建立伺服器設定與使用者資料檔的副本，然後透過網路瀏覽器下載到本地桌機。當前全部的設定檔與資料檔的容量大約$tarsize。實際備份檔案將略小於此數字，這取決於壓縮比例。\"驗證桌機備份檔\" 選項用於檢查桌機備份檔的完整性。
磁帶備份方式是在每天晚上使用$module的軟體套件備份整個硬碟到磁帶。這需要受支援的磁帶機與未被寫入保護的磁帶。備份將在每晚指定的時間自動執行（白天會自動電郵以提醒管理員）。目前您的硬碟包含$dumpsize容量的資料。
兩種還原方式皆允許您還原您的設定檔與使用者資料檔。理論上，還原應當執行於全新安裝的伺服器。
]]>磁帶備份。此法使用的軟體套件稱為$module用以每夜備份整顆硬碟到磁帶。這需要支援的磁帶機與非寫入保護的磁帶。此備份自動運作於每夜特定的時間（伴隨著白天寄給管理者的自動提醒電郵）。此時您的硬碟涵蓋$dumpsize的資料。
工作站備份。此法使用的軟體套件稱為dar用以備份您伺服器的設定檔與資料檔到網路分享空間或如同USB碟的可移除式磁碟。您可管理備份的滾動式設定組有多少被保留，以及每個設定組擁有多少增量式備份。此備份自動運作於每日特定的時間。當下您的設定與資料檔案全部接近$tarsize未壓縮量。兩次壓縮數據的大小需在分享空間容量內。
備份到桌機。此法複製您伺服器設定檔與使用者資料，並透過網路瀏覽器下載到您的本地端桌機。當下您的設定與資料檔案全部接近$tarsize。備份資料將稍微小於此量，這是根據有多少資料可被壓縮而來。倘若您複製到本地端可移除式磁碟如USB隨身碟，此檔可透過終端機被用來還原伺服器。
所有的備份方法允許您還原您的設定檔與使用者資料檔。工作站備份提供個別檔案的還原。實際上，完全還原應該運用於新安裝的伺服器。
]]>磁帶備份需要受支援的磁帶機。倘若磁帶機是空的，警示訊息將在指定的提醒時間傳送給管理員。
]]>執行前，請確認您已載入想要還原的磁帶於磁帶機中。
還原完成後，您必須重啟伺服器。
]]>只有當檔案被標記為[Saved]時，才會被包含於備份中。
來自以下共享文件夾的檔案已經被驗證：]]>
還原前，請確認您已選擇正確的備份檔。
還原完成後，您必須重啟伺服器。
備份文件將還原自：]]>下個介面將會顯示可用的文件和目錄，您可以選擇需要還原的項目。為了限制介面中顯示的文件和目錄數量，您有一個過濾選項，可用來規範所顯示的名稱。
您有義務不因還原檔案而中斷伺服器的工作。
現在，文件將還原自：]]>
增加網域 ]]>
您確定要移除該網域？
]]>組織DNS設定
]]>修正組織DNS設定 ]]>
委任郵件伺服器
您的伺服器涵蓋完整、全功能的電郵伺服器。然而，倘若基於某些理由您欲委任電郵處理程序給其他系統，請於此處指定欲委任系統的網路位址。一般操作下，此欄位請留白。]]>ETRN或multi-drop設定
對於ETRN或multi-drop，請指定次要郵件伺服器的主機名稱或者網路位址。（倘若使用標準設定，此欄位請留白。]]>SMTP伺服器
此伺服器能直接傳遞出站訊息至目的地（建議用於大部分情況）或者能透過您網際網路提供者的SMTP伺服器來傳遞這些訊息（建議用於倘若您有不可靠的網際網路連線或家用網際網路服務）。倘若使用您網際網路提供者的SMTP伺服器，請於下方設定其主機名稱或IP位址。要不然，此區域請留白。]]>電郵接收
]]>電子郵件傳遞
]]>Are you sure you wish to remove this hostname? ]]>
You can remove any information bay or reset its password by clicking on the corresponding command next to the information bay. If the information bay shows up in red, that means that the password has not yet been changed from the default, and should be changed soon.
]]>All files belonging to this information bay will be deleted.
Are you sure you wish to remove this information bay?
]]>- {$vhostList}
SME Server is freely available under the GNU General Public License and is only possible through the efforts of the SME Server community. However, the availability and quality of SME Server is dependent on meeting our expenses, such as hosting costs, server hardware, etc.
As such, we ask for a donation to offset costs and fund further development.
a) If you are a school, a church, a non-profit organisation or an individual using SME for private purposes, we would appreciate you to contribute within your means toward the costs associated with hosting, maintenance and development.
b) If you are a company or an integrator and you are deploying SME in the course of your work to generate revenue, we expect you to make a donation commensurate with the level of revenue you generate and the number of servers your have in the field. Please, help the project
This software comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY. Please click here to view detailed support, warranty and licensing information.
To perform a system administration function, click one of the links in the menu on the left of your screen.
]]>Click here for a list of system administration functions.
]]>Add network ]]>
"Router" should be the IP address of the router on your local network via which the additional network is reached. ]]>
Your server will grant local access privileges to {$totalHosts} IP addresses in the range {$firstAddr} to {$lastAddr}.
Warning: the ProFTPd FTP server cannot handle this nonstandard subnet mask. The simpler specification {$simpleMask} will be used instead.
]]>支援與授權
此軟體依據位於 支援與授權 頁面的條款發佈。 ]]>WARNING: Misuse of this feature can seriously compromise the security of your network. Do not use this feature lightly, or without fully understanding the implications of your actions.
]]>The printer name should contain only lower-case letters and numbers, and should start with a lower-case letter. For example "hplaser", "epsonlp", and "canonbj" are valid names.
]]>Pseudonyms allow you to create other names for existing users or groups. For example, you may wish to create a pseudonym "webmaster" for your "webdevelopers" group or a pseudonym "joe" for the user "joseph".
The server automatically creates pseudonyms of the form firstname.lastname and firstname_lastname for every user on the system and a pseudonym "everyone" which contains all users on the system.
Pseudonyms also allow you to create e-mail aliases for valid (virtual) domains & users. For example you can forward "sales@virtualdomain1.com" to user "mary" and "sales@virtualdomain2.com" to user "john". You must create the domains and user accounts before creating the email aliases.
Pseudonyms can also forward to other pseudonyms, although this is limited to one further level. For example the pseudonym "webmaster" can forward to the pseudonym "techsupport" which then forwards to a specified user "ray". This is useful where one user is responsible for multiple roles and saves having to change the pseudonym's associated with that user many times in the event that the user departs the organisation.
You can modify or remove a pseudonym by clicking on the corresponding command next to the pseudonym.
]]>請注意，產生這些報告可能得費時幾分鐘。
]]>If the user exceeds the "Limit with grace period", warnings will be generated. If this limit is exceeded for longer than a week or if the "Absolute limit" is reached, the user will be unable to store any more files or receive any more e-mail.
A setting of '0' for either limit disables that limit for the corresponding user.
The disk space for each user includes the user's home directory, e-mail, and any files owned by the user in information bays. ]]>
Secure Shell Settings
You can control Secure Shell access to your server. The public setting should only be enabled by experienced administrators for remote problem diagnosis and resolution. We recommend leaving this parameter set to "No Access" unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise. ]]>FTP Settings
You can also control FTP access to your server. We recommend leaving this parameter set to 'no access' unless you have a specific reason to do otherwise.Note: these settings limit access to the server and override other settings, including those for individual information bays.
]]>PPTP設定
您可允許PPTP存取伺服器。除非您需要PPTP存取，否則您應當藉由將參數設定為0來關閉此功能。]]>{$REMOTE_MANAGEMENT}
It is possible to allow hosts on remote networks to access the server manager by entering those networks here. Use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 to limit the access to the specified host. Any hosts within the specified range will be able to access the server manager using HTTPS.
]]>序列主控台
You can allow access to the server console 您可以允許透過終端機連結到伺服器序列埠來存取伺服器主控台。]]>Telnet Settings
WARNING: Telnet is currently enabled, but this feature is no longer supported. Telnet is inherently insecure and should only be used in circumstances where no practical alternative exists. You should change option to {$NO_ACCESS} and use secure shell if remote access is required. Once disabled, telnet will no longer appear on this screen. ]]>不需要的區塊可以留白。
您於下方建立的文字將經行修飾後重顯於您的網頁中。每當您欲重開段落時請留一行空白。倘若您欲強迫斷行而非重開段落（例如一行一電郵），可在每行欲中斷處輸入4個連續字元的
<BR>。
倘若您已客製化完成網站時 勿用此選項，因為這將覆寫網站目錄中的 "index.htm" 檔案。
]]>是否希望繼續？
]]>您可以修改、鎖定或移除任何帳號，或者透過點擊帳號旁邊的命令來重置帳號密碼。
倘若帳號被標示為鎖定，表示使用者的密碼需要重新設定。請注意，新建立的帳號會自動鎖定直到密碼變更。
]]>每個新帳號將建立兩個特殊的匿名。這些匿名具有可取代使用者由逗號(.)與底線(_)姓名所形成郵件帳號的能力。因此，對於帳號"betty"與名字"Betty"和姓氏"Rubble"建立這兩個匿名betty.rubble與betty_rubble。
此目錄訊息（部門、公司等）可從下方預設顯示處修正。此修正將套用到這位使用者。
]]>您確定您想要鎖定此帳號？ ]]>
您確定您想要移除此帳號？ ]]>
"{$filename}"ˋ無效的報告形式。
]]>倘若您無法修改新密碼，那表示您可能已經忘記舊密碼，您的系統管理人員可以從伺服器管理中重設密碼。
]]>